Panasonic DMR-EX98V Operating Instructions

Operating Instructions

DVD Recorder

Model No. DMR-EX98V

The illustrations in these Operating Instructions show images of the black model for Germany unless otherwise indicated.

Region number supported by this unit

Region numbers are allocated to DVD Recorders and DVD-Video according to where they are sold.

y The region number of this unit is “2”. y The unit will play DVD-Video marked with

labels containing “2” or “ALL”.

Example:

Guide

Quick Start

Web Site: http://www.panasonic-europe.com

Dear customer

Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully.

Before connecting, operating or adjusting this product, please read the instructions completely. Please keep this manual for future reference.

This DVD recorder is for viewing and recording free to view channels only, not pay TV or encrypted channels.

TV Guide system of this DVD recorder does not support analogue broadcasts.

Trademark of the DVB Digital Video Broadcasting Project (1991 to 1996) Declaration of Conformity (16th November

2007)

For Germany

No. 5141

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

No. 5145

Notice for DVB functions y Any function related to DVB (Digital Video

Broadcasting) will work in areas where DVB-T (MPEG2) digital terrestrial broadcasting is received. Consult your local Panasonic dealer with coverage areas.

y This unit has the capability for DVB

speciﬁ cations. But future DVB services cannot be guaranteed.

y This unit does not support MHP

(Multimedia Home Platform).

Basic

operations

EG EC

The GUIDE Plus+ system is available in the following countries:

Germany/Italy/Spain

(As of April 2008) y This service may not be available in some

areas in the above countries.

y There may be changes in the service areas. y This service is not available in Switzerland.

RQT9090-L

Table of contents

Getting started

Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

Included accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5

The remote control information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5

HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Disc and card care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

Video Cassette Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

Quick Start Guide

Control reference guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

The unit’s display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

STEP 1 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

Connecting a television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

Connecting a television and digital satellite receiver

or analogue decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Deﬁ nition Multimedia

Interface) cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

STEP 2 Channel reception settings and

TV aspect settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

HDD and disc information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

HDD and discs you can use for recording and play. . . . . . . . . . . 13

Play-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Discs that cannot be played. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Types of disc or title recorded on HDD for the type

of connected TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

USB memory and card information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

USB memories you can use on this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Cards you can use on this unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Regarding DivX ﬁ les, MP3 ﬁ les and still pictures

(JPEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Inserting discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Inserting a video cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

Inserting, removing the USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Inserting, removing the SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

Basic operations

Watching analogue and digital broadcasts . . . . . . . . . .18

Select the channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

To show subtitle (Digital broadcast only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

To select a language for DVB multi audio or DVB subtitle

(Digital broadcast only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Digital channel information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Playing recorded video contents/

Playing play-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Playing HDD or discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Playing a video cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Recording television programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

When recording digital broadcast with subtitle

or multiple audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

To specify a time to stop recording—One Touch Recording . . . .20

Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Using the TV Guide system to make timer recordings

(Digital broadcast only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Deleting titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

Using the DELETE Navigator to delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Deleting during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

Advanced operations

Important notes for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Advanced recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

HDD and DVD recording modes and approximate

recording times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

VHS Recording Modes and Durations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

When the format conﬁ rmation screen is displayed . . . . . . . . . . .25

When removing a recorded disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

Recording broadcasts from external equipment. . . . . .27

Making timer recordings on the television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Recording from digital satellite receiver or analogue decoder . . . 27 Linked timer recordings with external equipment

(digital satellite receiver) — EXT LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Copying from a video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Manual recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Advanced timer recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Using SHOWVIEW number to make timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . .30

Manually programming timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Series recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

To cancel recording when recording has already begun . . . . . . .31

To release the unit from recording standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Relief Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Check, change or delete a programme,

or resolve overlapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

If the “Overlapped Timer Recording” screen appears . . . . . . . . .32

Language for digital broadcast with multi-audio

or multi-subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Operations in the TV Guide system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

TV Guide data download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Advanced HDD or disc playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Operation during play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Changing audio during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—

Direct Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Switching the Direct Navigator appearance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

To sort the titles for easy searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

To play grouped titles To edit the group of titles

Playing DivX, MP3 and still pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Showing the menu screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Playing DivX video contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Playing MP3 ﬁ les . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Playing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Useful functions during still picture play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Advanced video cassette playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Adjusting the playback picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

VHS Index Search System (VISS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Changing audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

S-VHS Quasi Playback (SQPB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Playing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

To play music CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

To play music recorded on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Useful functions during music play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Convenient functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

FUNCTION MENU window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

To pause the TV programme you are watching—

Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Linked operations with the TV

(VIERA Link “HDAVI Control™”/Q Link). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Easy control only with VIERA remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

HDD

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

HDD

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

RQT9090

Editing

Editing titles/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Editing titles/chapters and playing chapters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Title operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Creating, editing and playing playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Creating playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Editing and playing playlists/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Playlist operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Editing still pictures and music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Editing still pictures (JPEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Album (still picture) and picture operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Editing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Album (CD)/group (MP3) and track (CD/MP3) operation. . . . . . .51

Deleting still pictures and music using DELETE Navigator . . . . . 51

Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Copying

Copying titles or playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

One Touch Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

HDD p DVD or VHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

VHS p HDD or DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

DVD p HDD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

DVD p VHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

Advanced Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Copying a ﬁ nalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW

(DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Copying a video cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Copying SD Video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Copying SD Video from an SD card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Copying SD Video from a video equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Copying still pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

Copying all the still pictures on the USB memory—

Copy All Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Copying new still pictures on the SD card—

Copy New Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

Copying using the copying list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

Copying music to HDD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

About the Gracenote® Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

Copying music from a music CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Copying music (MP3) from a USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW . . .64 To update the Gracenote

Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Reference

Additional connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Connecting a television and VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

Connecting a television and VCR, digital satellite receiver

or analogue decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

Connecting a television with AUDIO/VIDEO

or S VIDEO terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Connecting a television with COMPONENT VIDEO terminals . .82

Connecting an ampliﬁ er with a digital input terminal . . . . . . . . . .82

Connecting a stereo ampliﬁ er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and receiver . . . 83

Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

Troubleshooting guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

Speciﬁ cations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back cover

About descriptions in these operating instructions

y The illustrations in these operating instructions show image of

black model of DMR-EX98V for Germany.

For Germany For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

Italy, Spain and Switzerland.

y Pages to be referred to are indicated as “➡ {{”.

: indicates features applicable in Germany.

: indicates features applicable in

Getting started

Guide

Quick Start

Basic

operations

Setting menus

Using on-screen menus/Status message . . . . . . . . . . .66

Using on-screen menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

HDD, disc and card management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

Common procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

Setting the protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Providing a name for a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete all titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Deleting all the contents—Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Selecting the background style—Top Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

Selecting whether to show the Top Menu ﬁ rst—

Auto-Play Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

Enabling discs to be played on other equipment—Finalise . . . . .70

Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

Common procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

Sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

VHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Other Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Television operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Reference Setting menus Copying Editing Advanced

RQT9090

RF IN

RF OUT

AV 1 (TV)AV 2 (EXT)

AC IN

AV OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (PCM/BITSTREAM)

S VIDEO

VIDEO

RPBY

R-AUDIO-L

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

OUT

Safety precautions

Placement

Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight, high temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration. These conditions can damage the cabinet and other components, thereby shortening the unit’s service life.

Do not place heavy items on the unit.

Voltage

Do not use high voltage power sources. This can overload the unit and cause a ﬁ re.

Do not use a DC power source. Check the source carefully when setting the unit up on a ship or other place where DC is used.

AC mains lead protection

Ensure the AC mains lead is connected correctly and not damaged. Poor connection and lead damage can cause ﬁ re or electric shock. Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.

Grasp the plug ﬁ rmly when unplugging the lead. Pulling the AC mains lead can cause electric shock.

Do not handle the plug with wet hands. This can cause electric shock.

CAUTION!

THIS PRODUCT UTILIZES A LASER. USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE. DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR YOURSELF. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.

WARNING:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK OR PRODUCT DAMAGE, y DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN, MOISTURE,

DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND THAT NO OBJECTS FILLED WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES, SHALL BE PLACED ON THE APPARATUS.

y USE ONLY THE RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES. y DO NOT REMOVE THE COVER (OR BACK); THERE ARE NO

USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

Foreign matter

Do not let metal objects fall inside the unit. This can cause electric

shock or malfunction.

Do not let liquids get into the unit. This can cause electric shock or malfunction. If this occurs, immediately disconnect the unit from the power supply and contact your dealer.

Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit. They contain ﬂ ammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit.

Service

Do not attempt to repair this unit by yourself. If sound is interrupted, indicators fail to light, smoke appears, or any other problem that is not covered in these instructions occurs, disconnect the AC mains lead and contact your dealer or an authorized service centre. Electric shock or damage to the unit can occur if the unit is repaired, disassembled or reconstructed by unqualiﬁ ed persons.

Extend operating life by disconnecting the unit from the power source if it is not to be used for a long time.

THIS UNIT IS INTENDED FOR USE IN MODERATE CLIMATES.

This product may receive radio interference caused by mobile telephones during use. If such interference is apparent, please increase separation between the product and the mobile telephone.

The socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and easily accessible. The mains plug of the power supply cord shall remain readily operable. To completely disconnect this apparatus from the AC Mains, disconnect the power supply cord plug from AC receptacle.

CAUTION!

y DO NOT INSTALL OR PLACE THIS UNIT IN A BOOKCASE,

BUILT-IN CABINET OR IN ANOTHER CONFINED SPACE. ENSURE THE UNIT IS WELL VENTILATED. TO PREVENT RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARD DUE TO OVERHEATING, ENSURE THAT CURTAINS AND ANY OTHER MATERIALS DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE VENTILATION VENTS.

y DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE UNIT’S VENTILATION OPENINGS

WITH NEWSPAPERS, TABLECLOTHS, CURTAINS, AND SIMILAR ITEMS.

y DO NOT PLACE SOURCES OF NAKED FLAMES, SUCH AS

LIGHTED CANDLES, ON THE UNIT.

y DISPOSE OF BATTERIES IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY

FRIENDLY MANNER.

(Inside of product)

CAUTION

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

RQT9090

Included accessories

Please check and identify the supplied accessories. (Product numbers correct as of April 2008. These may be subject to change.)

 

For Germany

(N2QAYB000232)

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

(N2QAYB000233)

1 Remote control 1 AC mains lead

For use with this unit only. Do not use it with other equipment. Also, do not use cords for other equipment with this unit.

2 RF coaxial cables 2 Batteries

for remote control

1 Audio/video cable

The remote control information

■ Batteries

y Insert so the poles (+ and –) match those in the remote control. y Do not use rechargeable type batteries.

R6/LR6, AA

y Do not mix old and new batteries. y Do not use different types at the same time. y Do not heat or expose to ﬂ ame. y Do not leave batteries in an automobile exposed to direct sunlight

for a long period of time with doors and windows closed.

y Do not take apart or short circuit. y Do not attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries. y Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.

Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can damage items the ﬂ uid contacts and may cause a ﬁ re.

Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.

Remote control operations (➡ 8)

■ Use

Remote control signal sensor

7 m directly in front of the unit

Safety precautions/Included accessories/The remote control information

RQT9090

HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care

The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special device that is easily susceptible to damage. As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.

■ The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust

Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.

■ The HDD is a temporary storage device

The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or copying. It is recommended to save the recorded content on a disc or to keep the original data or CDs that they were copied from.

■ Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD

If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem, copy all content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on an HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.

y When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.

■ Setup precautions

y Do not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling fan

and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.

y Place the unit on a surface that is ﬂ at and not subject to

vibration or impact.

y Do not place on anything that generates heat like a video

cassette recorder, etc.

y Do not place in an area often subject to

temperature changes.

y Place in an area where condensation does

not occur. Condensation is a phenomenon where moisture forms on a cold surface when there is an extreme change in temperature. Condensation may cause internal damage to the unit.

y Conditions where condensation may occur

– When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving from

a very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa, or when subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air directly impacts the unit). When the HDD (warms during operation) is subjected to cold air, condensation may form on the inside of

the HDD and may cause damage to the HDD heads, etc. – When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room. – During the rainy season.

In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until condensation is gone.

DO NOT

This unit

VCR

■ Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or breakdown

The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray/vapor, etc. gets inside the unit.

■ While operating

y Do not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The HDD

may become damaged.)

y Do not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains

socket, or ﬂ ip the power breaker switch. While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or movement due to rotation is normal.

■ When moving the unit

1 Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the display.) 2 Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket. 3 Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx. 2

minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock. (Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating for a short time.)

■ HDD recording time remaining

This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording. If the remaining amount of time is insufﬁ cient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording. (Deleting a playlist will not increase the amount of time.)

RQT9090

■ Indemnity concerning recorded content

Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).

Unit care

The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust. Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.

y Do not place the unit on

ampliﬁ ers or equipment that may become hot. The heat can damage the unit.

y The unit should not be installed

or operated near large magnets or electromagnetic devices. Such devices can damage pre-recorded VHS recordings.

y Do not place any heavy objects on top of the unit. y The unit should not be mounted in a vertical position. It’s

designed to operate in the horizontal position.

y Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray and cassette

compartment are empty. Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the unit.

Note

Do not obstruct the rear panel’s internal cooling fan.

DO NOT

■ Cautions about condensation

Condensation can cause unreliable playback of VHS recordings. Condensation may form in the following cases, y The unit is brought from cold surroundings into a well-heated

room.

y The unit is suddenly brought from cool surroundings, such as an

air-conditioned room or car, to a place which is hot and humid.

y During rainy seasons. In any of the above-mentioned conditions, do not operate the unit for at least 2 hours. The unit is not equipped with a moisture sensor.

■ Maintenance

To clean this unit

Wipe with a soft, dry cloth.

y Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit. y Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the

instructions that came with the cloth.

To clean the DVD lens

Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it impossible to record or play discs. Use the DVD lens cleaner (not included) about once every year, depending on frequency of use and the operating environment. Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.

DVD lens cleaner: RP-CL720E y This lens cleaner may not be for sale depending on the region.

To clean the video heads

Dirt on the video heads can cause poor recording and play. If the picture does not improve, use an optional head-cleaning cassette. If the problem persists, seek advice from a qualiﬁ ed service person.

Head-cleaning cassette: NV-TCL30PT

Some optional accessories may not be available in some countries.

Disc and card care

■ How to hold a disc or card

Do not touch the recorded surface or the terminal surface.

DO DO NOT

■ Concerning non-cartridge discs

Be careful about scratches and dirt.

■ If there is dirt or condensation on the disc

Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.

DO DO NOT

■ Handling precautions

y Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc

warping and un-balanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)

y Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt

pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.

y Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static

electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.

y Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers. y Do not expose the terminals of the card to water, garbage or other

strange things.

y Do not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.

y Do not use the following discs:

– Discs with exposed adhesive from

removed stickers or labels (rental discs, etc.).

– Discs that are badly warped or cracked. – Irregularly shaped discs, such as heart

shapes.

y Do not place in the following areas:

– In direct sunlight. – In very dusty or humid areas. – Near a heater. – Locations susceptible to signiﬁ cant difference in temperature

(condensation can occur).

– Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.

y To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases

or cartridges when you are not using them.

The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a problem with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for any subsequent damage caused by such loss.

Examples of causes of such losses are y A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD

Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company.

y A disc used as described above and then played again in this

unit.

y A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer

disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this unit.

DO NOT

HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care/Unit care/Disc and card care/Video Cassette Information

Video Cassette Information

■ Video cassettes

y Break off the video cassette’s tab to

prevent accidental erasure. Cover the hole with a double layer of adhesive tape when you want to use the video cassette for recording again.

y You can use video cassettes with the VHS and S-VHS marks, but

the unit is unable to make full use of the characteristics of S-VHS video cassettes.

Ta b

■ Video cassette care

y Poor quality or damaged video cassettes can cause the heads to

become dirty and malfunction. Store your video cassettes carefully and discard them when they become dirty or damaged.

y Never use video cassettes on which juice has been spilled or

those that are extremely damaged since this will not only cause the heads to become dirty, but will also make the unit malfunction.

RQT9090

Control reference guide

TIME SLIP

JET REW

DISPLAY

STATUS

AUDI O

DIRECT TV REC

EXT LINK

REC MODE

REC

MANUAL SKIP

CREATE

CHAPTER

RETURN

PLAY

PAU S E

STOP

SLOW/SEARCH

SKIP/INDEX

RESET

REW FF

ShowView

TRACKING/V-LOCK/PAGE

SELECT

INPUT

DRIVE SELECT

DVD/VHS

VOL

DELETE

PROG/CHECK

EXIT

OPTION

F Rec

TIME SLIP

DISPLAYAUDI O

STTL

JET REW

ck cl

cq cr

6 7

bm bn

Remote control

Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.

For Germany

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

1 Turn the unit on (➡ 12) 2 Select drive [HDD, DVD, SD or VHS] (➡ 19, 20, 38)

Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].

3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers 4 To delete unwanted recorded titles, timer programmes, still

pictures or music/Reset the tape counter (➡ 22, 32, 51)

5 Basic operations for recording and play 6 Show digital channel information (➡ 18)/Programme information

within TV Guide screen (➡ 33)/Show status messages (➡ 67)

7 Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (➡ 12, 34) 8 Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR (➡ 35, 46) 9 Show OPTION menu (➡ 39, 46)

This menu is used when playing or editing titles and still pictures, etc.

bk Colour buttons

– for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (➡ 35, 38, 42) – for switching Video/Playlists (➡ 58) – for selecting character type when entering text (➡ 52) – for tuning settings (➡ 71) – for TV Guide operations (➡ 33)

bl Recording functions

y [* REC] Start recording (➡ 20) y [REC MODE] Change recording mode (➡ 20) y [EXT LINK] Linked timer recordings with external equipment

(➡ 27)

y [* DIRECT TV REC] Direct TV recording (➡ 44)

bm Select audio (Analogue broadcast only) (➡ 34, 41)

For Germany

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

Show subtitles (Subtitles can be viewed if the digital broadcast programme has subtitles.) (➡ 18)

bo Transmit the remote control signal bp Television operations (➡ 79) bq Channel select/Change pages in the TV Guide system/

TRACKING/V-LOCK (➡ 18, 33, 41)

br Show SHOWVIEW screen (➡ 30) bs Input select (AV1, AV2, AV3 or DV) (➡ 27, 28) bt Show Timer Recording screen (➡ 30) ck Exit the menu screen cl Show the TV Guide screen (➡ 21) cm Show FUNCTION MENU window (➡ 43)

By using the FUNCTION MENU window you may access the main functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.

cn Return to previous screen co Create chapter (➡ 34) cp Skip approx. 1 minute forward (➡ 34) cq Skip the speciﬁ ed time/Jet rewind button (JET REW)(➡ 34, 40) cr Show on-screen menu (➡ 66)

Menu for disc playback and changing DVB multi audio or subtitle etc.

Start Flexible Recording (➡ 26)

RQT9090

Main unit

1 32

8 bk bl bn9

1 Cassette eject (➡ 17) 2 Cassette compartment (➡ 17) 3 Open/close disc tray (➡ 17) 4 Start recording/Specify a time to stop recording (➡ 20) 5 Stop (➡ 19) 6 Start play (➡ 19) 7 Disc tray (➡ 17) 8 Standby/on switch (8) (➡ 18)

Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of power.

9 Connection for VCR, camcorder etc. (➡ 28) bk Remote control signal sensor bl Display (➡ below) bm HDD/DVD/SD/VHS drive indicator (➡ 19)

Lights when the HDD, DVD, SD or VHS drive is selected.

4 5 6 7

DVD

HDD

VHS

bobm bsbp bq br

Opening the front panel

Press down on the part with your ﬁ nger.

bn DRIVE SELECT (➡ 19, 20)

Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].

bo Channel select (➡ 18) bp Connection for digital video (DV) camcorder (➡ 28) bq SD card slot (➡ 17) br USB port (➡ 17) bs One Touch Copying operation (➡ 56, 57)

Rear panel terminals (➡ 10, 11, 80, 81, 82, 83)

Control reference guide

The unit’s display

1Timer recording indicator (z) (➡ 21)

On: When a timer recording programme is registered and a recordable disc or video cassette is inserted Flashes: When the unit cannot record a timer recording programme (e.g., there is no disc or video cassette, etc.)

2Recording mode indicator (➡ 24) 3Main display

y Current time y Disc recording and play counter y VHS recording and play counter y Miscellaneous messages, etc.

(for VHS) (for HDD/DVD)

4 5

8 97

4Copying indicator 5 Digital broadcast indicator

Lights when the unit is receiving digital broadcast or TV Guide data.

6 Linked timer recordings with external equipment indicator (➡ 27) 7 Tape indicator 8 Operation status 9 Disc indicator bk SD card slot indicator

(for HDD/DVD)(for VHS)

RQT9090

RF IN

RF OUT

AV 1 (TV)AV 2 (EXT)

AC IN

AV OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

S VIDEO

VIDEO

RPBY

R-AUDIO-L

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

OUT

VHF/UHF

RF IN

STEP 1 Connection

Make sure to use the pair of supplied RF coaxial cables

Use the pair of supplied RF coaxial cables only when you make connections to the unit through its RF IN and RF OUT terminals. Striping may appear and disrupt images on the TV if you use different cables for connection.

Using a 21-pin Scart cable

y You can use a variety of Q Link functions by connecting the unit to a Q Link compatible television (➡ 44). y You can enjoy high-quality viewing by connecting the unit to an RGB compatible television (➡ 97).

Required setting

y Before connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions. y Select the connection pattern that matches your environment from pattern A–B. Conﬁ rm connections not listed below with your

dealer.

y Refer to “Additional connections” (➡ 80) for connection using other terminals and connection with other equipment.

When the unit is not to be used for a long time

To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This unit consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off.

[approx. 2 W (Power Save mode)]

When “Power Save” is set to “On”, the “Quick Star t” function does not work.

“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (➡ 76)

Connecting a television

This unit’s rear panel

Cooling fan

Connecting a terminal other than

AC mains lead

(included) Connect only after all other connections are complete.

To household mains socket

(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)

Connecting a television and digital satellite receiver or analogue decoder*

* Information about the Decoder is for Italy, Spain and Switzerland only.

This unit’s rear panel

AV OUT

AC IN

OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (PCM/BITSTREAM)

the 21-pin Scart terminal (➡ 11, 82)

Television’s rear panel

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

RPBY

S VIDEO

R-AUDIO-L

VIDEO

OUT

RF coaxial cable

(included)

Fully wired 21-pin Scart cable

RF coaxial cable

(included)

AV 1 (TV)AV 2 (EXT)

To the aerial

Aerial cable

RF coaxial cable

(included)

To the aerial

Aerial cable

RF IN

RF OUT

RQT9090

Cooling fan

AC mains lead

(included) Connect only after all other connections are complete.

To household mains socket

(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)

Required setting

“AV2 Input” and “AV2 Connection

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

( (➡ 76)

Fully wired 21-pin Scart cable

Connecting a terminal other than the 21-pin Scart terminal (➡ 11, 82)

Digital satellite receiver or analogue decoder’s* rear panel

)” settings in the Setup menu

RF coaxial cable

(included)

Fully wired 21-pin Scart cable

AVAV

Connect the unit directly to the television

If you connect the unit through an AV selector

or video cassette recorder to the television,

video signal will be affected by copyright

protection systems and the picture may not be

shown correctly.

y When connecting to a television with a built-in VCR

Connect to the input terminals on the television side if there are both television and VCR input terminals.

VHF/UHF

RF IN

Television’s rear panel

DO NOT

Television

VCR

This unit

You can enjoy high-quality picture by adding the HDMI cable connection to the 21-pin Scart cable connection between this unit and your TV on

RF IN

RF OUT

AV 1 (TV)AV 2 (EXT)

AV OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

S VIDEO

VIDEO

RPBY

R-AUDIO-L

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

OUT

page 10.

Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Deﬁ nition Multimedia Interface) cable

When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Deﬁ nition Television), the output can be switched to 1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video. y This unit incorporates HDMI™ (V.1.3 with Deep Colour) technology that can reproduce greater colour gradation (4096 steps) when

connected to a compatible TV. A lower colour gradation (256 steps), without deep colour, will be reproduced if connected to a TV which does not support deep colour. The unit will automatically set appropriate output to suit the connected TV.

y Video sources converted to 1920 × 1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,

native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.

y Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover). y When outputting 1080p signal, please use the HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.

Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function

When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be possible. [➡ 44, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/Q Link)]

y Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised. y It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.

Recommended part number: RP-CDHG10 (1.0 m), RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG20 (2.0 m), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.

Television’s rear panel

HDMI IN

HDMI cable

Fully wired 21-pin Scart cable

Connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA)

If the 21-pin Scart cable is connected, the following functions are available.

y Download from the TV (➡ 44) y Direct TV Recording (➡ 44) y Watching pictures from digital satellite receiver or

analogue decoder*

(In this case, make sure to switch the television input to “AV”.)

STEP 1 Connection

HDMI AV OUT

Required setting

y Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and

Optical” (➡ 75). (The default setting is “HDMI and Optical”.)

This unit’s rear panel

Fully wired 21-pin

Scart cable

Digital satellite receiver or analogue decoder’s* rear panel

Note

y If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (➡ 96) and

output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)

y You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.

For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input terminal (PC monitors, etc.): Depending on the unit, images may not display properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)

* Information about the Decoder is for Italy, Spain and Switzerland only.

RQT9090

RETURN

SELECT

STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings

y When the channel could not be received properly, adjust

DVD/VHS

DRIVE SELECT

DELETE

RESET

SKIP/INDEX

STOP

STATUS

OPTION

VOL

TRACKING/V-LOCK/PAGE

2 54 8 0

6 9

INPUT

SELECT

SLOW/SEARCH

PAU SE

CREATE CHAPTER

−

ShowView

PROG/CHECK

REW FF

PLAY

MANUAL SKIP

EXIT

RETURN

EXIT

FUNCTION MENU

RETURN

DVD/VHS

Numbered

buttons

e, r, w, q

1 Turn on the television and select the

appropriate AV input to suit the connections to this unit.

2 Press [

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

y Country setting screen appears on the television.

Press [e, r] to select the country and press [OK].

For Germany

Only the Auto setup screens are displayed in German in the operating instructions. After completing step 3, change the on-screen display to English in the following steps.

1 Press [FUNCTION MENU]. 2 Press [e, r] to select “Weit. Funktionen” and press [OK]. 3 Press [e, r] to select “Setup” and press [OK]. 4 Press [e, r] to select “Display” and press [q]. 5 Press [e, r] to select “Sprachauswahl” and press [OK]. 6 Press [e, r] to select “English” and press [OK]. 7 Press [EXIT].

y DVB Auto-Setup starts.

The unit will search for the terrestrial digital channels. TV channels will be located and stored ready for use. This takes about 5-10 minutes.

Bitte warten! Kan 5

Prog. Kanal Sender Name Net ID TS ID Qualität

1 2

RETURN: Abbrechen

RETURN

When DVB Auto-Setup is completed, analogue Auto-Setup starts. This takes about 8 minutes.

DVD/VHS] to turn the unit on.

Country

France España Italia Schweiz Suisse Svizzera

RETURN: leave OK: access

DVB Auto-Setup

352

ABC

354

ABC 2

12302 12302

12289 1228999

Sendersuchlauf

Kan

Suche analoge Sender, bitte warten. RETURN: Abbrechen

RETURN

3 Press [

4 Press [

5 Press the numbered buttons or

6 When the download has ﬁ nished

Press [OK].

To stop partway

Press [RETURN].

Note

y When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes while

the position and direction of the aerial.

For Germany

When using an indoor antenna, – make sure that there is nothing causing interference. – switch “Active Antenna” to “On” in the Setup menu

(➡ 76) if the antenna is not equipped with power supply.

Then repeat the Auto-Setup.

After analogue Auto-Setup is complete, TV aspect setting screen appears. y If you selected “Schweiz”, “Suisse” or “Svizzera” in the

Country setting, the “Power Save” setting menu appears after analogue Auto-Setup is complete. Select “On” or “Off” (➡ 77). Then TV aspect setting screen appears.

TV Bildschirmformat

16:9-Breitbild-TV

4:3-TV

SELECT

16:9

Pan & Scan

Letterbox

RETURN

y 16:9:

When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television

y Pan & Scan:

When connected to a 4:3 aspect television, side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture (➡ 96).

y Letterbox:

When connected to a 4:3 aspect television. 16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style (➡ 96).

] to select the TV aspect

e, r

and press [OK].

When television picture appears, set up is complete.

If the conﬁ rmation screen of GUIDE Plus+ data download appears, perform the following steps.

(For information about GUIDE Plus+ system ➡ 21)

] to select “Ja” and press

w, q

[OK]

Post Code

Gewähltes Land : XXXXXX Dieses Gerät aktualisiert die GUIDE Plus+ Daten mehrmals pro Tag.

CHANGE

RETURN

Number

[e, r, w, q] to enter your postal code and press [OK].

GUIDE Plus+ data download starts. This takes about 30 minutes.

Set up is complete.

■ If the clock setting menu appears

Set the clock manually (➡ 77).

■ To conﬁ rm that stations have been tuned correctly (➡ 71, 72)

■ To restart set up (➡ 71)

the screen is being displayed, the screen saver is displayed. To return to the previous screen, press [OK].

HDD and disc information

HDD and discs you can use for recording and play

({: Possible, –: Impossible)

Disc type

Standard symbol

Hard disk drive (HDD)

HDD

DVD-RAM

RAM

Logo

–

Data that can

be recorded

and played

Video

Still picture

Music

Video

Still picture

Rewritable

{

{{ { {

DVD-R

-R

before ﬁ nalisation

DVD-V

after ﬁ nalisation

DVD-R DL*

-R DL

before ﬁ nalisation

DVD-V

after ﬁ nalisation

Video –

DVD-RW

-RW(V)

before ﬁ nalisation

DVD-V

after ﬁ nalisation

Video

{{ {

before ﬁ nalisation

DVD-V

after ﬁ nalisation

+R DL

before ﬁ nalisation

DVD-V

after ﬁ nalisation

+R DL*

+RW

y The explanations concerning discs are indicated by

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL

– Video –

– Video

DVD

, and those concerning video cassettes are indicated by

{{

Finalisation needed for playback on other equipment (➡ 70).

RAM

can be played back on Panasonic DVD recorders and

DVD-RAM compatible DVD players.

-R DL , +R DL

+RW

can be played back only on equipment

compatible with these discs. *2 For further information (➡ 23, Important notes for recording) *3 The audio selected in “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ 74) is

recorded.

-R DL +R DL

RAM -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

You cannot directly record to these discs (➡ right).

To use a new disc, formatting is

necessary (➡ 69).

+RW

If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend

you create top menu (➡ 70).

y Use of Panasonic discs is recommended.

For available recording times for different discs under different recording modes, see “HDD and DVD recording modes and approximate recording times” (➡ 24).

y Formatting and/or recording/initializing constraints may prevent

you from playing or recording certain discs.

y Please see speciﬁ cations (➡ 95) for compatible disc versions and

recording speeds.

■ Recording format

This unit records video in the following formats.

DVD Video Recording format

This is a recording method which allows you to record and edit television broadcasts and so on.

y You can delete unwanted parts of a title, create playlists, etc. y The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” can be

recorded to a CPRM compatible disc.

DVD-Video format

-R -R DL -RW(V)

This recording method is the same as commercially available DVD-Video. y The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be

recorded even if using a CPRM compatible disc.

y After ﬁ nalising the disc, you can play the disc on DVD players and

other equipment.

+VR (+R/+RW Video Recording) format

This is a method for recording moving pictures to +R/+RW discs. You can playback such discs recorded in this method in a similar way as contents recorded in the DVD-Video format. y The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be

recorded.

y After ﬁ nalising the disc or creating the top menu, you can play the

disc on DVD players and other equipment.

HDD RAM

+R +R DL +RW

Play on

other

players*

Recording 16:9

aspect picture*

–

{{{

Recording both M 1

and M 2 for bilingual

broadcasts*

Copy-once

recording

(CPRM)

{

CPRM (➡ 96)

compatible discs

only

{{

{

– (4:3 aspect)

Note

–*

(Either one)

–*

(Either one)

–*

(Either one)

–*

(Either one)

–*

(Either one)

–*

(Either one)

VHS

–

y When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, the restrictions on

secondary audio recording are also applied to DVD-RAM. Turn this setting “Off” if high speed copy to

+R DL +RW

is not necessary (The default setting is “On”. ➡ 73).

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R

y +R discs recorded with this unit and +R discs recorded with

another Panasonic DVD Recorder may be incompatible. However, discs that are ﬁ nalised are compatible and can be played.

y This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have

PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)

y You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the

discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the recording.

You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.

Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.

When playing DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)

DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer, single-sided) discs have two writable layers on one side. If there is not enough space on the ﬁ rst layer to record a programme, the remainder is recorded on the second layer. When playing a title recorded on both layers, the unit automatically switches between layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme. However, video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers.

When switching layers: Video and audio may momentarily cut

Second recordable layer

The available space

First recordable layer

Title 1 Title 2

(Inner section of the disc)

Playback direction (Outer section of

the disc)

DVD-R DL

+R DL

STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings/HDD and disc information

RQT9090

HDD and disc information

Play-only discs

Disc type Logo

DVD-Video

DVD-RW (DVD

Video

Recording

format)

DVD-R

DVD-R DL

–

Video CD

SVCD

* Close the session after recording. Play may be impossible on some discs due to the condition of the recording. y The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating

instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.

y Operation and sound quality of CDs that do not conform to CD-DA speciﬁ cations (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.

Standard

symbol

DVD-V

-RW(VR)

DivX, MP3,

JPEG

DivX, MP3,

JPEG

VCD

Uses

High quality movie and music discs

DVD-RW video recorded on another DVD recorder y You can play programmes that allow “One time only recording” if they

have been recorded onto a CPRM compatible disc.

y By formatting (➡ 69) the disc, you can record onto it in DVD-Video

format.

y It may be necessary to ﬁ nalise the disc on the equipment used for

recording.

y DVD-R and DVD-R DL with video recorded in DivX y DVD-R and DVD-R DL with music recorded in MP3 y DVD-R and DVD-R DL with still pictures recorded in JPEG

Recorded audio and music (including CD-R/RW*)

y CD-R and CD-RW with video recorded in DivX y CD-R and CD-RW with music recorded in MP3 y CD-R and CD-RW with still pictures recorded in JPEG

y Recorded music and video (including CD-R/RW*)

Discs that cannot be played

y 2.6 and 5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm y 3.95 and 4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring y DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL recorded on another unit

and not ﬁ nalised (➡ 96)

y Discs recorded with AVCHD format. y DVD-Video with a region number other than “2” or “ALL” y DVD-Audio y Blu-ray, HD DVD y DVD-ROM, +R (8 cm), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD,

SACD, MV-Disc, PD

Types of disc or title recorded on HDD for the type of connected TV

When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback a title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC, refer to this table. ({: Possible to view, –: Impossible to view)

TV type

Multi-system TV

PAL TV

NTSC TV

*1 If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60 signals the

picture will not be shown correctly.

*2 Select “NTSC” in “TV System” (➡ 75). y When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you

match the “TV System” setting to the title (PAL or NTSC) (➡ 75).

Disc/Titles

recorded on HDD

PA L

NTSC

PA L

NTSC

PA L –

NTSC

Yes/No

{ { {

(PAL60)

RQT9090

USB memory and card information

USB memories you can use on this unit

USB memories which are deﬁ ned as USB mass storage class, and digital cameras that use PTP protocol:

– USB memories that support USB 1.0/1.1 and USB 2.0 Full Speed/High Speed.

y USB memories of up to 128 GB can be used.

Compatible USB memories

Format

Indicated in these instructions by

Data that can be played or copied ({: Possible, –: Impossible)

File format DivX MP3 Still pictures (JPEG) Playing

Copying to HDD –

Instructions

y Despite meeting the conditions mentioned above, there may be USB memories that cannot be used for this unit. y If a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD is connected to this unit’s USB port, you can copy the SD Video shot with the camera to this

unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM.

Note

y This unit’s USB port does not support bus-powered USB device.

y USB memories that support bulk only transfer.

CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) is not supported.

y Digital Cameras which require additional programme installation when connected to a PC are not

supported.

y MTP (Media Transport Protocol) device is not supported. y A multi-port USB card reader is not suppor ted.

FAT16 and FAT32 ﬁ le systems are supported.

y UDF/NTFS/exFAT ﬁ le system is not supported. y Depending on the sector size, some ﬁ les may not work. y Only the ﬁ rst partition on USB memories with multi-partition is supported.

USB

{{{

{{

You can play DivX ﬁ les recorded with a computer onto the USB memory (➡ 36).

You can play and copy to HDD MP3 ﬁ les recorded with a computer onto the USB memory (➡ 37, 64).

You can play and copy to HDD or DVD-RAM still pictures recorded with a computer onto the USB memory (➡ 38, 62).

Cards you can use on this unit

SD Memory Card* (from 8 MB to 2 GB) SDHC Memory Card (from 4 GB to 16 GB)

Type

Indicated in these instructions by

Data that can be recorded and played

Instructions

Suitable SD cards

y When using SD cards 4 GB or larger, only SD cards that display

the SDHC logo can be used.

y Useable memory is slightly less than the card capacity. y Please conﬁ rm the latest information on the following website.

http://panasonic.co.jp/pavc/global/cs

(This site is in English only.)

y If the SD card is formatted on other equipment, the time

necessary for recording may be longer. Also, if the SD card is formatted on a PC, you may not be able to use it on this unit. In these cases, format the card on this unit (➡ 69, 96).

y This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card

Speciﬁ cations FAT12 and FAT16 formats, as well as SDHC Memory Cards in FAT32 format.

y SDHC Memory Cards used for recording with this unit can only be

used with other SDHC Memory Card-compatible equipment. SDHC Memory Cards cannot be used with equipment that is only compatible with SD Memory Cards.

y We recommend using a Panasonic SD card. y This unit cannot play AVCHD format motion pictures on an SD

card.

y Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent

swallowing.

MultiMediaCard

* Including miniSD Card and microSD Card

The card types mentioned above will be referred to as “SD card” in these operating instructions.

Still pictures (JPEG) Video (SD Video)

You can insert directly into the SD card slot.

* A miniSD Card and a microSD Card must be used with the adaptor that comes with the card.

y You can play and copy still pictures taken on a digital camera etc. (➡ 38, 62). y SD Video shot with a Panasonic SD Video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or DVD-RAM (➡ 61). y SD Video cannot be played directly from the SD card.

Structure of folders

¼¼¼: Numbers XXX: Letters

Card

DCIM

XXXXX

(Picture folder)

Any folder with JPEG ﬁ les e.g.,

001

P0000001.JPG P0000002.JPG

SD_VIDEO

PRG

MGR_INFO

(MPEG2 information folder)

XXXX .JPG

(MPEG2 folder)

MOV .MOD

.MOI

MOV PRG .PGI

HDD and disc information/USB memory and card information

These folders are shown earlier in the Album View screen than other still picture folders.

RQT9090

002

001

001track.mp3 002track.mp3 003track.mp3

003

001track.mp3 002track.mp3 003track.mp3

001track.mp3 002track.mp3 003track.mp3 004track.mp3

Regarding DivX ﬁ les, MP3 ﬁ les and still pictures (JPEG)

RQT9090

DivX

Playable

-R -R DL CD USB

media File format DivX

y Files must have the

extension “.DIVX”, “.divx”, “.AVI” or “.avi”.

Number of folders

Number of

Maximum number of folders recognizable: 300 folders (including the root folder)

Maximum number of ﬁ les recognizable*

: 200 ﬁ les

ﬁ les Support

version

Plays all versions of DivX video (including DivX 6) with standard playback of DivX media ﬁ les. Certiﬁ ed to the DivX Home Theater Proﬁ le.

Video – Number of stream: Up to 1 – Codec: DIV3, DIV4, DIVX, DV50 – Picture size: 32 x 32 to 720 x 576 – FPS (Frame Per Second): Up to 30 fps Audio – Number of stream: Up to 8 – Format: MP3, MPEG, AC3 – Multi channel: AC3 is possible. MPEG multi is 2 ch

conversion.

MP3

Playable

HDD -R -R DL CD USB

media File format MP3

y Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.

Number of folders (groups)

Number of ﬁ les

Maximum number of folders (groups) recognizable: 300 folders (groups) (including the root folder)

Maximum number of ﬁ les (tracks) recognizable* 3000 ﬁ les (tracks)

(tracks) Bit rates 32 kbps to 320 kbps Sampling

16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1kHz/48 kHz

frequency ID3 tags

compatible (

HDD USB

)

y If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within an MP3

ﬁ le, play may not be possible.

Still pictures (JPEG*

Playable

HDD RAM -R -R DL CD USB SD

)

media File format File format: JPEG

y Files must have the extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”.

Number of pixels

Number of folders*

Between 34 x 34 and 6144 x 4096 (Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)

-R -R DL CD USB

recognizable: 300 folders

HDD RAM SD

Maximum number of folders

This unit can handle a maximum of

300 folders.

Number of

ﬁ les*

-R -R DL CD USB

recognizable*1: 3000 ﬁ les

HDD RAM SD

Maximum number of ﬁ les

This unit can handle a maximum of

3000 ﬁ les.

MOTION

not supported

JPEG

Total number of recognizable ﬁ le including MP3, JPEG, DivX and

other types of ﬁ les is 4000. *2 It may take a few moments for still pictures to display. *3 When there are many ﬁ les and/or folders, some ﬁ les may not

display or be playable.

-R -R DL CD

y Compatible formats: ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended

formats) and Joliet

y This unit is compatible with multi-session but reading or play of the

disc may take time if there are a lot of sessions.

y Operation may take time to complete when there are many ﬁ les

(tracks) and/or folders (groups) and some ﬁ les (tracks) may not display or be playable.

y English alphabet and Arabic numerals are displayed correctly.

Other characters may not be displayed correctly.

y The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is

displayed on a computer.

y Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), ﬁ les

(tracks) and folders (groups) may not play in the order you numbered them.

y This unit is not compatible with packet-write format. y Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not play.

HDD RAM SD

y Compatible formats: DCF*4 compliant (Content recorded on a

digital camera, etc.)

*4 Design rule for Camera File system: uniﬁ ed standard established

by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA).

■ Structure of folders displayed by this unit

You can play MP3 and still pictures (JPEG) on this unit by making folders as shown below. However depending on the method of writing data (writing software), play may not be in the order you numbered the folders.

Structure of MP3 folders

-R -R DL CD USB

Preﬁ x with 3-digit numbers in the order you want to play them.

Structures of still picture folders

-R -R DL CD USB

Files inside a folder are displayed in the order they were updated or taken.

RAM

The following can be displayed on this unit. ¼¼¼: Numbers

XXX: Letters

Still pictures on the root

folder can also be displayed.

*2 Folders can be created on

other equipment. However, these folders cannot be selected as a copying destination.

y If a folder name or ﬁ le name

has been input using other equipment, the name may not be displayed properly or you may not be able to play or edit the data.

Root

Order of play

Root

P0000001.jpg P0000002.jpg

Order of play

Root

XXXX .JPG

JPEG

DCIM

(folder = group)

(ﬁ le = track)

002

P0000003.jpg P0000004.jpg P0000005.jpg

003

P0000006.jpg P0000007.jpg P0000008.jpg P0000009.jpg

004

P0000010.jpg P0000011.jpg P0000012.jpg

XXXXX

XXXX .JPG

XXXXX

XXXX .JPG

Inserting discs

1 Press [; OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.

■ Cartridge disc

Insert label-up. Insert label-up with the

2 Press [; OPEN/CLOSE] to close the tray.

Automatic drive select function

RAM

[Only for discs with the write-protect tab on the cartridge set to

“PROTECT” (➡ 68, Cartridge—protection)]

DVD-V CD VCD

y If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it automatically

switches to the DVD drive when a disc is inserted.

y If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is

automatically selected.

arrow facing in.

Insert fully.

Note

y When using 8 cm DVD-RAM, or 8 cm DVD-R, remove the disc

from the cartridge.

RAM

It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc and turn it over.

RAM

When using cartridge discs with the write-protect tab in the

protect position (➡ 68), play automatically starts when inserted in the unit.

Inserting a video cassette

Insert a video cassette.

The surface on which you can see a roll of tape should face up.

The unit is automatically turned on.

To eject:

From main unit

y Press [; EJECT] on the main unit.

From remote control

y Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select VHS drive and then press and hold [g] for about 3 or more

seconds.

Inserting, removing the USB memory

Inserting the USB memory

y Before inserting any USB memory to this

unit, ensure that the data stored therein has been backed up.

y Check the orientation of the USB connector

and insert it straight in.

y Insert a USB device while the unit is

stopped, so the “USB device” screen is displayed. Select an item and press [OK] to switch to the USB-related operations (➡ 36, 62).

Removing the USB memory

y Complete all USB-related operations and pull the USB memory

straight out.

y If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the data may

be damaged.

Inserting, removing the SD card

When the card indicator (“SD”) on the unit’s display is ﬂ ashing, the card is being read from or written to. Do not turn off the unit or remove the card. Such action may result in malfunction or loss of the card’s contents.

y Inserting foreign objects can cause a malfunction.

Inserting the card

Press on the centre of the card until it clicks into place.

If you are using a miniSD card or a microSD card, insert it into the adaptor that comes with the card. Insert and remove this adaptor from the unit.

e.g., miniSD

ADAPTER

Removing the card

1 Press on the centre of the card.

2 Pull it straight out.

Insert the card label up with the cut-off corner on the right.

Automatic drive select function

y If you insert an SD card while the unit is stopped, the “SD Card” screen is displayed. Select an item and press [OK] to switch to the SD drive

(➡ 36, 62).

y If you remove an SD card, the HDD drive is automatically selected.

Regarding DivX ﬁ les, MP3 ﬁ les and still pictures (JPEG)/Inserting discs/Inserting a video cassette/Inserting, removing the USB memory/Inserting, removing the SD card

RQT9090

Watching analogue and digital broadcasts

TIME SLIP

DISPLAY

STAT U S

AUDIO

DIRECT TV REC

EXT LINK

REC MODE

REC

MANUAL SKIP

CREATE

CHAPTER

RETURN

ShowView

SELECT

INPUT

DRIVE SELECT

VOL

DELETE

PROG/CHECK

EXIT

OPTION

F Rec

JET REW

TIME SLIP

DISPLAYAUDIO

STTL

JET REW

RQT9090

For Germany

DVD/VHS

Numbered

buttons

RESET

SKIP/INDEX

STOP

PAU SE

STATUS

e, r, w, q

DISPLAY

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

DISPLAY

STTL

Select the channel

1 Turn on the television and select the

appropriate AV input to suit the connections to this unit.

2 Press [ 3 Press [

Everytime you change the station, digital channel information appears automatically (terrestrial digital channels only). Channels are displayed in the order of digital channels ﬁ rst, and then followed by analogue channels.

y You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.

e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5] 15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5] 115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]

To show subtitle (Digital broadcast only)

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

y Subtitle is available in Italy, Spain and Switzerland only.

When “Subtitle” appears in digital channel information (➡ right)

Press [STTL ].

y Press again to hide the subtitle. y Programmes are recorded with subtitle when you record them with

the subtitle displayed (➡ 20).

To select a language for DVB multi audio or DVB subtitle (Digital broadcast only)

When there are multiple audio or subtitle in the current channel, you can select a language. y Subtitle is available in Italy, Spain and Switzerland only.

1 Press [DISPLAY].

DVD/VHS] to turn the unit on.

CH] to select the channel.

1 2

“D” means digital broadcasts.

TRACKING/V-LOCK/PAGE

−

SLOW/SEARCH

REW FF

PLAY

2 Press [

] to select the “Sound”

e, r

menu or “Other” menu and press [q].

3 Press [

] to select “DVB Multi

e, r

Audio” or “DVB Subtitle” and press [q].

e.g., DVB Multi Audio

Disc Play Picture Sound Other

4 Press [

DVB Multi Audio

V.S.S

Dialogue Enhancer

] to select the language

e, r

English

Off

and press [OK].

Digital channel information

While stopped

Press [STATUS ] to show the information screen.

Programme name and Broadcast time

Channel and Station Name

352 ABC2 18:53No Signal

ABC News 19:00 - 19:30

Encrypted SubtitleMulti Audio

Progress of the current programme

During scrambled broadcasting (Cannot be viewed with this unit.)

To switch information of the current programme and the next programme

Press [w, q].

To show detailed information about the programme

Press [STATUS ] again (only when “info ” is displayed).

To hide the information screen

Press [STATUS

Signal Quality

No Signal: The digital broadcast signal is not being received. No Service: No broadcasts are currently available.

If “No Signal” is displayed:

y Adjust the position and direction of the aerial. y Check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly

broadcasting.

Note

y You can also select the other channel when the information screen

is displayed by pressing [e, r] and [OK].

■ If New service message appears

When a DVB channel is added or deleted, this unit will be informed automatically. Then the conﬁ rmation message appears. If you select “Yes” on the display, Auto-Setup starts (All channel settings and all created proﬁ les are deleted. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.).

New Service

A New DVB Service has been found. Start DVB Auto-Setup. Selecting DVB Auto-Setup will delete current Proﬁ le settings and all Timer Programmes.

The display/hide setting can be changed (➡ 74, New Service Messages).

Signal Quality (➡ below)

] once or twice.

NoYes

RETURN

Proﬁ le

All Services

Change Proﬁ le

NOW

Change the proﬁ le

info

(➡ 71)

Subtitle (➡ left)

Programme is broadcast in multi-channel sound (➡ left)

Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs

STATUS

DIRECT TV REC

EXT LINK

REC MODE

REC

MANUAL SKIP

CREATE

CHAPTER

RETURN

ShowView

DRIVE

SELECT

Refer to “Advanced HDD or disc playback” (➡ 34) and “Advanced video cassette playback” (➡ 40) for detail information.

DVD/VHS

VOL

RESET

SKIP/INDEX

REC MODE

2 54 8 0

TRACKING/V-LOCK/PAGE

3 6 9

INPUT

SELECT

SLOW/SEARCH

REW FF

PAUSE

CREATE

CHAPTER

EXT LINK

−

ShowView

PROG/CHECK

PLAY

EXIT

RETURN

MANUAL SKIP

DIRECT TV REC

Numbered

buttons

e, r, w, q

OPTION

DRIVE SELECT

DELETE

STOP

STAT U S

OPTION

REC

Preparation

y Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit

the connections to this unit.

y Turn on this unit.

Playing HDD or discs

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW DVD-V -RW(VR) CD VCD

1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the

HDD or DVD drive.

The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s front panel.

2 If you selected the DVD drive

Press [; OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to open the tray and insert a disc.

y Press the button again to close the tray.

3 Press [

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW -RW(VR)

Play starts from the most recently recorded title.

DVD-V VCD

Play starts from the point speciﬁ ed by the disc.

Play starts from the beginning of the disc.

] (PLAY).

RETURN

Note

y During recording, timer recording standby or EXT LINK standby,

this unit cannot play discs or titles that do not match the “TV System” (➡ 75) setting. It is recommended “TV System” be set to match the discs or title before playing them.

y Depending on the disc, it may take time for the menu screen,

pictures, sound, etc. to start.

y The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you

may not always be able to control play as described in these operating instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.

y When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you

match the “TV System” setting to the recorded title (➡ 75).

■ When a menu screen appears on the television

DVD-V

Press [e, r, w, q] to select the item and press [OK].

y Some items can also be selected using the numbered buttons. y If you are instructed to press the “ENTER” button by the menu

screen or the disc’s instruction document, press [OK].

VCD

Press the numbered buttons to select the item.

e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [5] 15: [1] ➡ [5]

y To return to the menu screen

DVD-V

1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [e, r] to select “Top Menu” or “Menu” and press [OK].

VCD

Press [RETURN].

Note

Discs continue to rotate while menus are displayed. Press [g] when you have ﬁ nished playback to protect the unit’s motor, your television screen and so on.

Playing a video cassette

VHS

1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the

VHS drive.

The VHS indicator lights up on the unit’s front panel.

2 Insert a recorded video cassette

(➡ 17).

Play starts automatically if you insert a cassette with the accidental erasure tab removed.

3 Press [

Note

] (PLAY).

y When the tape reaches its end, the unit automatically rewinds it to

the beginning. This function does not work during timer recording, fast-forwarding and speciﬁ ed stop recording.

y Jet Search, cue, review or slow playback will be automatically

cancelled after 10 minutes and for pause it will be cancelled after 5 minutes.

y When playing back a tape which was recorded on another VCR, it

may be necessary to adjust the tracking (➡ 41). In some cases the picture quality may still be inferior. This is due to format constraints.

y SECAM recorded VHS tapes cannot be played on this unit.

Watching analogue and digital broadcasts/Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs

Menu operation for other type of contents

y DivX (➡ 36) y MP3 (➡ 37) y Still pictures (JPEG) (➡ 38) y Music on HDD (➡ 42) y Music CD (➡ 42)

RQT9090

Recording television programmes

ShowViewShowView

CHCH

SELECT

INPUT

AVAV

DRIVEDRIVE SELECTSELECT

VOL

DELETE

PROG/CHECK

EXIT

STAT U SSTATUS

−

PLAY

PAU SE

STOP

SLOW/SEARCH

SKIP/INDEX

RESET

REW FF

DVD/VHS

TRACKING/V-LOCK/PAGE

TIME SLIPTIME SLIP

DISPLAYDISPLAYAUDIOAUD IO

DIRECT TV RECDIRECT TV REC

EXT LINKEXT LINK

REC MODEREC MODE

RECREC

F Rec

RQT9090

Refer to “Important notes for recording” (➡ 23) and “Advanced recording” (➡ 24) for detail information.

3 51

Numbered

buttons

AUDIO

HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW VHS

RAM -RW(V) +R +RW

(➡ 25).

y When recording a digital radio broadcast or a digital broadcast

that is not being received correctly, the digital channel information (➡ 18) is also recorded.

Preparation

y Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit

the connections to this unit.

y Turn on this unit.

To use a new disc, formatting is necessary

JET REW

1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the

HDD, DVD or VHS drive.

The HDD, DVD or VHS indicator lights up on the unit’s front panel.

2 If you selected the DVD drive

Press [; OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to open the tray and insert a disc.

y Press the button again to close the tray.

If you selected the VHS drive

Insert a video cassette with an intact accidental erasure prevention tab.

3 Press [

Channels are displayed in the order of digital channels ﬁ rst, and then followed by analogue channels.

To select with the numbered buttons: e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5] 15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5] 115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]

VHS

The “DV” channel can be selected however it cannot

be recorded.

4 Press [REC MODE] to select the

recording mode.

y Recording modes and approximate recording times (➡ 24)

y To record sound using LPCM (XP mode only):

Set the “Audio Mode for XP Recording” to “LPCM” in the Setup menu (➡ 74).

CH] to select the channel.

1 2

“D” means digital broadcasts.

Remaining time

5 Press [

Recording will take place on open space on the HDD or disc. Data will not be overwritten. y You cannot change the channel or recording mode during

recording.

y You can record while the unit is in standby for timer

recording. However, once the time for the timer recording to

begin is reached, any recording taking place will stop and the timer recording will begin.

HDD RAM

Speed Copy” is set to “Off ” (➡ 73), you can change the audio being received by pressing [AUDIO] during recording. (Does not affect the recording of audio.)

VHS

– Even if the video cassette is labelled “S-VHS”, it is not

possible to record in the S-VHS system with this unit. This unit records in the normal VHS system.

– When recording is paused for 5-minutes or more, the

unit returns to stop.

REC] to start recording.

(Analogue broadcast only) When “Rec for High

■ To pause recording

Press [h].

Press again to restart recording. You can also press [* REC] to restart. (Title is not split into separate titles.)

■ To stop recording

Press [g].

y From the start to the end of the recording is called one title.

-R -RW(V) +R +RW

complete recording management information after recording ﬁ nishes.

In order to play DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +R (recorded with this unit) on other DVD players, it is necessary to ﬁ nalise them (➡ 70).

VHS

It is not possible to record SECAM signal on a video

cassette.

USB

It is not possible to record on a USB memory.

It is not possible to record on a card.

It takes about 30 seconds for the unit to

When recording digital broadcast with subtitle or multiple audio

If a programme to record has subtitle or multiple audio, you can record with subtitle or selected audio. y Subtitle is available in Italy, Spain and Switzerland only.

To record with subtitle

Before start recording, press [STTL If the programme has multiple subtitle, select the desired language (➡ 18). y Subtitle cannot be switched after recording.

To record with the selected audio

Before start recording, select the desired language for audio (➡ 18).

] to show the subtitle.

To specify a time to stop recording— One Touch Recording

During recording

Press [* REC] on the main unit to select the recording time.

y You can specify up to 4 hours later. y The unit display changes as shown below.

OFF 0:30 OFF 1:00 OFF 1:30 OFF 2:00 Counter (cancel) OFF 4:00 OFF 3:00 y This does not work during timer recordings (➡ 21, 30) or while

using Flexible Recording (➡ 26).

y The unit turns off automatically after the time to stop recording is

reached.

To cancel

Press [* REC] on the main unit several times until the counter appears. y The time to stop recording is cancelled; however, recording

continues.

To stop recording

Press [g].

Timer recording

TIME SLIP

DISPLAYAUDIO

DIRECT TV REC

EXT LINK

REC MODE

REC

MANUAL SKIP

CREATE

CHAPTER

RETURN

ShowView

SELECT

INPUT

DRIVE SELECT

VOL

DELETE

PROG/CHECK

EXIT

OPTION

F Rec

STATUS

Refer to “Advanced timer recording” (➡ 30–33) for detail information.

DVD/VHS

TRACKING/V-LOCK/PAGE

−

RESET

SLOW/SEARCH

SKIP/INDEX

STOP

STAT U S

PAU SE

REW FF

PLAY

2, 3

See also “Important notes for recording” (➡ 23).

Depending on the type of disc used for recording or the type of broadcast, there may be restrictions on the title you are trying to record.

HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW VHS

y You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance. (Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)

RAM -RW(V) +R +RW

y To use a new disc, formatting is necessary.

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

y You cannot switch subtitles during timer recording.

Preparation

y Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit

the connections to this unit.

y If recording to DVD, insert a disc that you can use for recording

(➡ 13).

y Make sure that the clock settings are correct (➡ 77).

Using the TV Guide system to make timer recordings (Digital broadcast only)

TV Guide system provides programme information only from the digital broadcasts station displayed on the television like a TV programme magazine. This unit receives the programme information differently according to where you live.

– Receiving with GUIDE Plus+ system

The GUIDE Plus+ system is available in the following countries (as of April 2008):

Germany/Italy/Spain

y This service may not be available in some areas in the above

countries.

y There may be changes in the service areas. y This service is not available in Switzerland. y Visit the following homepage for more information.

http://www.europe.guideplus.com

– Receiving from the broadcast station

In the area where GUIDE Plus+ system is not available, TV Guide is displayed with the provided data from broadcast station.

Note

y TV Guide does not work if the clock is not set correctly. y If the unit is disconnected from the AC mains, all programme data

are not updated.

y TV Guide system of this unit does not support analogue

broadcasts. Analogue broadcasts can be recorded manually or with the SHOWVIEW system (➡ 30).

y GUIDE Plus+ system may not work properly if the wrong post

code is entered.

1 Press [GUIDE].

Wed 15.10.08 12:53

SELECT

RETURN

TV Guide: Landscape

Wed 15. 10

7 ITV 1

19:00 20:00

Emmerdale : In today,s show we will...

19:30 20:00 20:30 21:00 21:30

Time:

East

ABC 1

Hot Wars

ABC 2

Emmerdale...

ITV 1

Football and my life

CH 111

News

five

Me out of here !

ITV 2

Rugby

S4C

SELECT

RETURN

2 Press [

TV Guide: Landscape

Wed 15. 10

7 ITV 1

19:00 20:00

Emmerdale : In today,s show we will...

Time:

19:30 20:00 20:30 21:00

East

ABC 1

Hot Wars

ABC 2

Emm...

ITV 1

Scrapheap Car Show

CH 111

News

five

Me out of here !

ITV 2

Rugby

S4C

{OPTION: Select Advert

info

Change Display Mode

Guide

D.I.Y. SOS

Holiday Program

Coronation Street

Pepsi Chart Show

Sex and the City

Pop Idol

15 to 1 Scrapheap ...

info

Change Display Mode

Guide

e, r, w, q

All ServicesAll Types

D.I.Y. SOS

Holiday Program

Coronation Street

Pepsi Chart Show

Terminator 2

Sex and...

Pop Idol

15 to 1 Scrapheap C...

Wed 15.10.08 12:53

All ServicesAll Types

Red Cap

The Bill

Terminator 2

] to select the future

programme and press [OK].

y If “Selection Screen” is displayed, press [e, r] to select

“Single Timer Rec.” and press [OK]. Refer to “Series recording” for “Series Timer Rec.” (➡ 31).

Timer

Remain HDD 30:24 SP DVD 1:58 SP

Recording

All Services : ARD

y Conﬁ rm the programme (start and end time) by using a TV

magazine, etc. and make corrections if necessary using [e, r, w, q] (➡ 30, right column, step 3).

VHS 2:33 SP WED 15.10.08. 12:54:00

Name Date Start Stop Mode

1 ARD 21. 10. TUE 16:00 17:00 HDD

Fliege-Die Talkshow

Drive

Programme Name

When GUIDE Plus+ system is available

Red Cap

Holiday ...

The Bill

News

Proﬁ leProg. Type+24 Hr

Page +

Page –

When GUIDE Plus+ system is not available

Holiday Progr

News

Proﬁ leProg. Type+24 Hr

Page +

Page –

3 Press [OK].

The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is displayed.

15:30 16:00 16:30

Abenteuer...

Fliege-Die Talkshow

“z” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording standby has been activated. Repeat steps 2–3 to programme other recordings. Press [^ DVD/VHS] to turn the unit off.

Note

If “NTSC” has been selected for “TV System” (➡ 75), the TV Guide system cannot be used.

■ To cancel a timer recording on the TV Guide screen

1 Press [e, r, w, q] to select the programme in the TV Guide and

press [OK]. “Selection Screen” appears.

2 Press [e, r] to select “Delete” and press [OK]. 3 Press [w, q] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. (“z” in the TV Guide

disappears.)

Note

y The receipt of the TV Guide system data is only possible via the

aerial input of this unit. The receipt of the TV Guide data via externally connected satellite receivers is not possible.

y If you set a timer recording that will overlap with other timer

recordings, the “Overlapped Timer Recording” screen appears to help you resolve the overlapping. Follow the on-screen instructions.

■ To cancel recording when recording has already begun (➡ 31)

■ To release the unit from recording standby (➡ 31)

■ Notes on timer recording (➡ 32)

Timer icon

Recording television programmes/Timer recording

RQT9090

Deleting titles

DIRECT TV REC

EXT LINK

REC MODE

REC

MANUAL SKIP

CREATE CHAPTER

RETURN

ShowView

DRIVE

SELECT

STATUS

DVD/VHS

VOL

2 54 8

SELECT

PAU SE

CREATE

CHAPTER

REC MODE

EXT LINK

TRACKING/V-LOCK/PAGE

−

ShowView

PROG/CHECK

INPUT

SLOW/SEARCH

REW FF

PLAY

EXIT

RETURN

MANUAL SKIP

DIRECT TV REC

EXIT

RETURN

DRIVE

DRIVE SELECT

SELECT

DELETE ¼

u, i

2, 3, 4, 5

“Red”

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

DELETE

RESET

SKIP/INDEX

STOP

STAT U S

OPTION

REC

(You cannot delete items on ﬁ nalised discs.) y A title cannot be restored once it is deleted. Make certain

before proceeding.

y You cannot delete while recording or copying.

Preparation

y Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.

RAM

Release protection (➡ 68, Setting the protection).

Using the DELETE Navigator to delete

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [

] to select “Delete” and

e, r

press [OK].

DELETE Navigator

HDD

HDD RAM

button to select “VIDEO”.

3 Press [

10.10.

RETURN

Grouped Titles

11.10. 2

OPTION

Select

VIDEO

NextPage 02/02

PICTURE

NextPrevious

MUSIC

When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”

e, r, w, q

] to select the title

and press [h].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary titles. y Press [h] again to cancel.

To show other pages (Thumbnail Display only)

Press [u, i] to show other pages.

You can conﬁ rm the titles, that you have selected using the option menu. y Refer to option menu operations for the “Title View” (➡ 46,

step 4).

4 Press [OK].

■ Available disc space after deleting

HDD RAM

Available disc space increases after deleting any of these titles.

-RW(V) +RW

the last recorded title is deleted.

Available disc space does not increase even after deleting.

This space becomes available for recording after all the later recorded titles are deleted.

-R -R DL +R +R DL

after the contents are deleted.

The space deleted becomes available for recording.

Last title

.....Title Title

recorded

Available recording space increases only when

Available disc space increases after deleting.

Last title

.....Title Title

recorded

Later recorded titles

Last title

.....Title Deleted

recorded

Available space does not increase even

Available disc

space

Available disc

space

Available disc

space

5 Press [

] to select “Delete” and press

[OK].

The title is deleted.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Deleting during play

1 While playing

Press [DELETE ¼].

2 Press [

press [OK].

The title is deleted.

] to select “Delete” and

w, q

RQT9090

Important notes for recording

Selecting Audio for Recording

About the aspect when recording a programme

Broadcast in multi-channel sound (Digital broadcast only):

You can select the audio language when receiving audio in multi channel broadcast [“Multi Audio” appears at the bottom of digital channel information display (➡ 18)]. However, audio cannot be switched after recording.

Bilingual broadcasts (Analogue broadcast only):

HDD RAM VHS

Both main and secondary audio can be recorded.

You can change the audio during playback. (➡ 34, Changing audio during play)

However in the following cases, select whether to record the main or secondary audio:

M 1 M 2

Hello

If you record from external equipment

– Select “M 1” or “M 2” on the external equipment.

HDD RAM

-R -RW(V) VHS

Recordings will be made using the “Aspect for Recording” in the Setup menu. (The default setting is “4:3” ➡ 73)

However, in the following case, programme will be recorded in 4:3.

-R -RW(V)

(recordings 5 hours or longer) recording modes will be recorded in 4:3 aspect.

Hallo

(When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”)

Programme recorded using “EP” or “FR”

– Recording sound in LPCM (➡ 74,

Audio Mode for XP Recording)

– “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set

to “On” (The default setting is “On”. ➡ 73)

Hello Hola Hallo

Select the audio that you want to record in “DVB Multi Audio” in the on-screen menu (➡ 67).

-R -RW(V) +R +RW

Select the main or secondary audio before recording.

(➡ 74, Bilingual Audio Selection)

M 1

Hello

The selected audio only is recorded.

HDD RAM

set to “Off”) The programme will be recorded in the original aspect.

+R +RW

The programme will be recorded in 4:3 aspect.

(When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is

Deleting titles/Important notes for recording

When you want to copy titles in high speed mode from the HDD to DVD-R, etc.

When recording the “One time only recording” broadcasts

Playing the disc on other DVD players

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD. (The default setting is “On”. ➡ 73)

You can copy titles in high speed mode (max. speed is 75X*); however, the audio and aspect settings (➡ above) are necessary before recording to the HDD. * Depending on the disc, max. speed may vary.

Record to the HDD High speed copy to DVD-R, etc.

HDD

In the following cases, high speed mode does not work.

+R +R DL +RW

-R -R DL -RW(V)

It is not possible to record the broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” onto DVD-R, DVD-RW, +R, +RW or 8 cm DVD-RAM discs. Use the HDD or CPRM (➡ 96) compatible DVD-RAM.

RAM

HDD

y “One time only recording” titles can only be transferred from the HDD to CPRM compatible DVD-RAM (They are

deleted from the HDD). They cannot be copied.

y Even when copying to videotape the title may not be copied correctly because of the copy guard. y You cannot copy a playlist created from “One time only recording” titles.

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL

The disc must be ﬁ nalised after recording or copying (➡ 70).

It is necessary to ﬁ nalise DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or copying titles to them. You can then play them in the same way as a commercially sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record.* * You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.

Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect

Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode

CPRM compatible discs only

-R -RW(V) +R +RW

({: Can do, –: Cannot do)

Record to DVD-R, etc.

Play on other DVD equipment

Finalise

+RW

If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend you create top menu (➡ 70).

Recording to DVD-R DL and +R DL

y It is not possible to record to HDD (Hard Disk Drive), DVD or VHS drive while recording to the other drive.

You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.

Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.

RQT9090

Advanced recording

HDD and DVD recording modes and approximate recording times

Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may become shorter than indicated. (The times provided on this chart are an estimate.)

Recording Mode

XP (High picture

HDD

(250 GB)

55 hours 1 hour 2 hours 1 hour 1 hour 45 min. 1 hour 45 min.

Single-sided

(4.7 GB)

quality recording mode)

SP (Standard

110 hours 2 hours 4 hours 2 hours 3 hours 35 min. 3 hours 35 min.

recording mode) LP (Long recording

221 hours 4 hours 8 hours 4 hours 7 hours 10 min. 7 hours 10 min.

mode) EP (Extra long

recording mode)* FR (Flexible

Recording Mode)*

It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other.

441 hours

(331 hours*2)

441 hours maximum

8 hours

(6 hours*2)

8 hours maximum 8 hours maximum

*2 When “Recording time in EP mode” is set to “EP (6 Hours)” in the Setup menu (➡ 73).

The sound quality is better when using “EP (6 Hours)” than when using “EP (8 Hours)”.

You cannot record directly to DVD-R DL and +R DL discs with this unit. The table shows the recording time when copying.

+R DL

You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode.

*4 When recording to the HDD in “EP” or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode, you cannot perform high-speed copy to +R, +R DL or +RW

discs.

RAM

When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP (8 Hours)” mode, play may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM.

Use “EP (6 Hours)” mode if playback may be on other equipment.

HDD

y You can record up to 499 titles on HDD. (When continuously recording for long durations, titles are automatically divided every 8 hours.)

RAM -R -RW(V)

y You can record up to 99 titles on one disc.

+R +RW

y You can record up to 49 titles on one disc.

FR (Flexible Recording Mode)

You can set FR (Flexible Recording) mode when copying or programming timer recordings. The unit automatically selects a recording rate between XP and EP (8 Hours) that will enable the recordings to ﬁ t in the remaining disc space with the best possible recording quality. For example with a 90 minute recording to an unused DVD-RAM, the picture quality is adjusted to between “XP” and “SP”.

y When recording to the HDD, picture quality is automatically adjusted to precisely ﬁ t a copied title on a 4.7 GB disc. y All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in the display.

DVD-RAM DVD-R

DVD-RW

Double-sided*

(9.4 GB)

16 hours

(12 hours*2)

+RW

(4.7 GB)

8 hours

(6 hours*2)

8 hours maximum 14 hours 20 min. Approximately

for one side

DVD-R DL*

(8.5 GB)

14 hours 20 min.

(10 hours 45 min.

+R DL*

(8.5 GB)

*2)

9 hours with video

quality equivalent

to LP mode.

RQT9090

VHS Recording Modes and Durations

Recording Mode Durations SP (Standard

recording mode)

LP (Long recording mode)

EP (Extra long recording mode)

AUTO

Note

y To prevent recording errors:

Set a timer recording period slightly longer than the actual programme (to make sure the programme is recorded in full).

y If the image quality is important to you or if you wish to store the

tape for a long period, select “SP”.

y The unit can play tapes recorded in LP mode on other equipment.

You can record the length shown on the tape.

2 times the length of SP mode. y LP cannot be selected when recording

NTSC signals.

3 times the length of SP mode.

Automatically switches the recording mode to LP (NTSC to EP) mode during a timer recording if there is not enough tape left to record the programme in SP mode.

y AUTO Mode

Timer recording

1st programme

(30 min)

30 min at SP

2nd programme

(45 min)

15 min

30 min

at SP

at LP

Video tape (e.g.: 60-minute cassette) – The tape length must be set correctly (➡ 76). – Picture distortion may occur when the recording mode switches. – This may not work correctly with some video cassettes. – It may not work correctly when NTSC is set as the “TV System”

(➡ 75).

When the format conﬁ rmation screen is displayed

RAM -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

When you insert a new disc or a disc recorded on a computer or other equipment, a format conﬁ rmation screen is displayed. Format the disc to use it. However, all the recorded contents are deleted.

Format

This disc is not formatted properly. Do you want to format the disc now ?

SELECT

Press [w, q] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

To format a disc

“Deleting all the contents—Format” (➡ 69)

NoYes

RETURN

When removing a recorded disc

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL

The following screen appears when you have not processed the disc for play on other equipment.

Finalise the disc so that it can be played on other DVD players. Note: Recording or Editing is not possible after ﬁ nalising. This may take up to min.

■ To ﬁ nalise the disc

Press [* REC] on the main unit.

y You cannot stop this process once you have started it. y If you want to set the background, play menu select or provide a

disc name, select “Top Menu” (➡ 70), “Auto-Play Select” (➡ 70) or “Disc Name” (➡ 68) in “DVD Management” before ﬁ nalising.

■ To open the tray without disc ﬁ nalisation

Press [; OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit.

Finalise

Press the REC button to start ﬁ nalise.

Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to exit. The disc cannot be played on other DVD players without ﬁ nalising.

Playing while you are recording

y You can play HDD, DVD or VHS while recording to the other drive.

The recording will not be affected.

− HDD/DVD playback (➡ 19, 34, 35)

− VHS playback (➡ 19, 40, 41)

Note

You cannot watch images on a tape from the HDD/DVD priority out terminals while recording on HDD or a disc (➡ 80).

HDD RAM

Playing from the beginning of the title you are recording—Chasing playback

Press [q] (PLAY) during recording.

There is no sound output while searching forward or backward.

To stop play

Press [g].

To stop recording

2 seconds after play stops, press [g].

To stop timer recording

2 seconds after play stops 1 Press [g]. 2 Press [w, q] to select “Stop Recording” and press [OK].

Playing a title previously recorded while recording—Simultaneous rec and play

y You can also change the drive and play while recording. Press

[DRIVE SELECT].

1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] during

recording.

2 Press [

e, r, w, q

press [OK].

y There is no sound output while searching forward or

backward.

To stop play

Press [g].

To exit the Direct Navigator screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

To stop recording

After play stops 1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit screen. 2 If the recording is on the other drive

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive.

3 Press [g].

To stop timer recording

After play stops 1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit screen. 2 If the recording is on the other drive

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive.

3 Press [g]. 4 Press [w, q] to select “Stop Recording” and press [OK].

Note

“Chasing playback” and “Simultaneous rec and play” can only be used with programmes of the same encoding system (PAL/NTSC).

] to select a title and

Advanced recording

RQT9090

Advanced recording

Flexible Recording

(Recording that ﬁ ts the remaining disc space)

HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW

The unit sets the best possible picture quality that ﬁ ts the recording within the remaining disc space. The recording mode becomes FR mode.

■ Using “Flexible Rec” is convenient in these kinds of situations.

RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW

y When the amount of free space on the disc makes selecting an

appropriate recording mode difﬁ cult

y When you want to record a long programme with the best picture

quality possible

HDD

y When you want to record a title to HDD so that it can then be

copied to ﬁ t one 4.7 GB disc perfectly

y You do not need to edit the recorded title, or change the recording

mode when copying, to ﬁ t the disc space.

e.g., Recording a 90 minute programme to disc

If you select XP mode, the programme will not ﬁ t one disc.

If you try to record a 90 minute programme in XP mode, only the

4.7GB

DVD-RAM

If you select SP mode, the programme will ﬁ t one disc.

4.7GB

DVD-RAM

If you select “Flexible Rec” the programme will ﬁ t one disc perfectly.

4.7GB

DVD-RAM

However there will be 30 minutes remaining disc space.

ﬁ rst 60 minutes will ﬁ t on the disc and the 30 minute balance will not get recorded. y Another disc is necessary.

5 When you want to start recording

Press [e, r, w, q] to select “Start” and press [OK].

y Recording starts. y All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in the

display.

To exit the screen without recording

Press [RETURN].

To stop recording partway

Press [g].

To show the remaining time

Press [STATUS

Remaining time of recording

HDD

REC 0:59

1 DVB ABC1

L R

4.7GB

DVD-RAM

Necessary space for recording

Preparation

y Select the channel or the external input to record. y Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.

For Germany

While stopped

Press [F Rec].

(➡ Go to step 4)

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [

] to select “To Others” and

e, r

press [OK].

3 Press [

] to select “Flexible Rec”

e, r

and press [OK].

Flexible Rec

Record in FR mode.

Maximum rec. time

4 Press [

8 Hour 00 Min.

8 Hour 00 Min.Set rec. time

CancelStart

] to select “Hour” and

w, q

Maximum recording time

This is the maximum recording time in EP (8 Hours) mode.

“Min.” and press [e, r] to set the recording time.

y You can also set the recording time with the numbered

buttons.

y You cannot record more than 8 hours.

RQT9090

Recording broadcasts from external equipment

See also “Important notes for recording” (➡ 23).

Making timer recordings on the television

(e.g., of digital broadcasts)

HDD

To make a timer recording with your television, connect to a television with a Q Link function (➡ 44) that you can use for setting timer recordings using a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable (➡ 10).

1 Make timer programming on the TV. 2 Turn off this unit.

The start and end of recording is controlled by the TV. y The titles are recorded to the HDD.

To stop recording

Press [g].

Note

y When this unit is in EXT LINK standby (“EXT-L” is shown on the

unit’s display), recording from television does not start.

y Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the end

time of the earlier timer recording and the start time of the later timer recording are close to each other. To divide the titles, go to “Divide Title” (➡ 47).

Recording from digital satellite receiver or analogue decoder*

HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW VHS

* Information about the Decoder is for Italy, Spain and Switzerland

only.

Preparation

y Connect a digital satellite receiver or analogue decoder to this

unit’s input terminals (➡ 10).

y When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,

change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 75).

y This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have

PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)

y Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or VHS drive.

1 While stopped

Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the input channel for the equipment you have connected.

e.g., If you have connected to AV2 input terminals, select “A2”.

2 Press [REC MODE] to select the

recording mode.

3 Select the channel on the other

equipment.

4 Press [

Recording starts.

To skip unwanted parts

Press [h] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)

To stop recording

Press [g].

REC].

Linked timer recordings with external equipment (digital satellite receiver) — EXT LINK

HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW VHS

To record programmes from digital satellite receiver using timer programming

Preparation

y Make sure you connect the AV2 input terminal of this unit to the

Scart terminal of a VCR or a digital satellite receiver with a 21-pin Scart cable (➡ 10, 80, 81).

y Set “AV2 Input” to match the connected equipment in the Setup

menu (➡ 76).

y Set “Ext Link” to match the connected equipment in the Setup

menu (➡ 76).

1 Make timer programming on the

external equipment.

2 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the

HDD, DVD or VHS drive.

If you selected the DVD or VHS drive, insert a disc or video cassette with enough remaining blank space (➡ 17).

3 Press [EXT LINK].

The unit turns off and “EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording standby has been activated.

To cancel the external control

Press [EXT LINK] to stop recording or to cancel linked timer recording standby. y In order to prevent accidental operation, press [EXT LINK] to

cancel the setting after recording is ﬁ nished.

Note

y This function does not work when “TV System” is set to “NTSC” in

the Setup menu (➡ 75).

y This function does not work with some equipment. Refer to the

equipment’s operating instructions.

y The beginnings of recordings may not be recorded correctly in

some cases.

y Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the end

time of the earlier timer recording and the start time of the later timer recording are close to each other.

HDD RAM

y When this unit is in EXT LINK standby (“EXT-L” is shown on the

unit’s display), the TV Guide data cannot downloaded.

y While the unit is in EXT LINK standby mode or recording, video

picture is from the AV2 input terminal irrespective of “AV1 Output” setting (➡ 76).

y During EXT LINK standby mode or recording, playback is only

available from the drive performing the recording.

y When “EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display, Direct TV Recording is

unavailable.

y While the unit is in EXT LINK standby mode or recording, most

operations on this unit are prohibited ([; OPEN/CLOSE], [8] etc.). When you operate, press [EXT LINK] to cancel EXT LINK standby mode or recording (This unit turns on and “EXT-L” disappears.).

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

“Decoder”, EXT LINK is not available (➡ 76).

To divide the titles, go to “Divide Title” (➡ 47).

When “AV2 Connection” is set to

Advanced recording/Recording broadcasts from external equipment

RQT9090

Copying from a video cassette recorder

e.g., Connecting to the AV3 or DV input terminals on the front

y Turn off the unit and other video equipment before connecting.

This unit

DV IN

Yellow

White Red

DV cable

S Video

cable*

Other video equipment

Connect to Audio/Video output terminals.

If the audio output of the other equipment is monaural

Connect to L/MONO on the AV3 input terminals at the front. * The S VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the

VIDEO terminal.

When recording from the unit’s DV terminal

y Select the type of audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input”

in the Setup menu (➡ 74).

y When recording from DV equipment (e.g., digital video

camcorder), you can record audio/video recordings from DV tape only.

y When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (➡ 73) is set to “On” and you

make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected in “Aspect for Recording” (➡ 73) of the Setup menu.

About the aspect when recording a programme (➡ 23)

Note

y If it becomes time for a timer recording to start while copying, the

recording will start and the copying will stop.

y If video is copied from another piece of equipment to this unit,

then the video quality will be degraded.

Audio/Video cable

(IEEE 1394, 4-pin)

Manual recording

HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW VHS

Preparation

y Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or VHS drive. y Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode. y When recording bilingual programmes (➡ 23, Important notes for

recording)

y When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,

change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 75). This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)

y To reduce noise in input from a video cassette recorder, set “Input

NR” to “On” in the on-screen menu (➡ 66).

y Check the time on the unit is correct.

1 While stopped

Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the input channel for the equipment you have connected.

e.g., If you have connected to AV3 input terminals, select “A3”.

Recording to HDD or DVD

HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW

Perform step 1 (➡ above).

2 Start play on the other equipment. 3 When you want to start recording

Press [* REC].

Recording starts.

Recording to VHS

VHS

Perform step 1 (➡ above).

2 Press [

Start playing the video cassette and ﬁ nd the recording start point.

3 Press [

Put the unit in recording standby mode.

] (PLAY)

], then press [* REC].

4 Start play on the external device. 5 Press [

] at the point where you want

to start recording.

To skip unwanted parts

Press [h] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)

To stop recording

Press [g].

Almost all videos and DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent illegal copying. Any software that has been so treated cannot be recorded using this unit.

y Using Flexible Recording (➡ 26), you can record the content of a

video cassette (approx. 1–8 hours) to a 4.7 GB disc with the best possible quality of recording without wasting disc space.

Note

VHS

It is not possible to record SECAM signal on a video

cassette.

RQT9090

DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec)

HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW HDD

RAM

are recorded as a title while at the same time chapters are created at each break in the images and the playlist is created automatically.

Preparation

1 Turn off the main unit and DV equipment, then connect the

2 Turn on the main unit. y When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,

change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 75).

When the “DV Auto Rec” function is used, programmes

equipment with the unit’s DV input terminal (➡ 28).

1 Turn on the DV equipment, and pause

play at the point you want recording to start.

The following screen appears.

DV Auto Rec

DV unit is connected. Record from the DV unit?

Rec to HDD CancelRec to DVD

SELECT

RETURN

y When the screen is not displayed

After performing step 1 1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive. 2 Press [FUNCTION MENU]. 3 Press [e, r] to select “To Others” and press [OK]. 4 Press [e, r] to select “DV Auto Rec” and press [OK]. ➡ Go to step 3 (➡ below).

2 Press [

“Rec to DVD” and press [OK].

] to select “Rec to HDD” or

w, q

Copying from a video cassette recorder

3 Press [REC MODE] to select the

recording mode.

4 Press [

[OK].

Recording starts.

When recording ﬁ nishes

The conﬁ rmation screen appears. Press [OK] to ﬁ nish DV automatic recording.

To stop recording

Press [g].

Note

y Only one piece of DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder)

can be connected to the unit via the DV input terminal.

y It is not possible to operate the unit from the connected DV

equipment.

y The DV input on this unit is for use with DV equipment only. (It

cannot be connected to a computer, etc.)

y The DV equipment name may not be shown correctly. y Depending on the DV equipment, the images or audio may not be

input properly.

y The date and time information on the tape of the DV equipment

will not be recorded.

y You cannot record and play simultaneously.

If the DV automatic recording function does not work properly, check the connections and DV equipment settings, and turn the unit off and back on.

If that does not work, follow the instructions for manual recording (➡ 28).

] to select “Rec” and press

w, q

RQT9090

Advanced timer recording

22:3022:00 HDD

1 ARD

22:3022:00 HDD

1 ARD

Using SHOWVIEW number to make timer recordings

Entering SHOWVIEW numbers is an easy way of timer recording. You can ﬁ nd these numbers in TV listings in newspapers or magazines.

Note

The SHOWVIEW system is not supported for digital broadcasts.

1 Press [ShowView].

Timer Recording

HDD 30:24 SP DVD 1:58 SPRemain VHS—:— —TUE 14.10.08. 12:53:00

Input ShowView Number 0-9, and press OK.

2 Press the numbered buttons to enter

HOWVIEW number.

the S

Press [w] to move back to correct a digit.

3 Press [OK].

Timer Recording

All Services : ARD

y Conﬁ rm the programme (start and end time) by using a TV

magazine, etc. and make corrections if necessary using [e, r, w, q] (➡ right column, step 3).

y When “-- ---” appears in the “Name” column, you cannot set

timer recording. Press [e, r] to select desired programme position. After you have entered the information of a TV station, it is kept in the unit’s memory.

HDD 30:24 SP DVD 1:58 SPRemain

—:— —

VHS

Name Date Star t Stop Mode

1 ARD 14. 10. TUE 16:00 17:00 HDD

Fliege-Die Talkshow

TUE 14.10.08. 12:53:00

Drive

Programme Name

4 Press [OK].

The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is displayed.

NameNo.

Timer icon

“z” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording standby has been activated.

TUE 14.10.08. 12:56:00

Drive

Stop

20:00

Drive

HDD

Mode

space

Check to make sure “OK” is displayed (➡ 32).

Programme

Repeat steps 1–4 to programme other recordings. Press [^ DVD/VHS] to turn the unit off.

ARD

3 Press [

] to move through the items

and change the items with [e, r].

Timer Recording

All Services : ARD

Timer Recording

All Services : ARD

y When “Name” is selected, you can press the “Blue” button

to change the proﬁ le [e.g., TV, Radio, Edit Proﬁ les screen (➡ 71)] and then press [e, r] to select the channel you want to record.

y Press and hold [e, r] to alter the Start (Start time) and

Stop (Finish time) in 30-minute increments.

y You can also set Name (Programme position/TV Station

Name), Date, Start (Start time), and Stop (Finish time) with the numbered buttons.

y Date

Date: Current date up to one month later

Daily timer:

Weekly timer:

Titles recorded using the same daily or weekly timer are bundled and displayed as a “group” in the Direct Navigator screen (➡ 35) except when using Auto Renewal Recording.

y You can also press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording

drive. When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough remaining space, recording automatically switches to the “HDD” (➡ 31, Relief Recording).

y You can also press [REC MODE] to change the recording

mode.

HDD

ON'OFF

y Programme Name

Press [w, q] to select “Programme Name” and press [OK]. (➡ 52, Entering text)

y STTL (Subtitles) (Digital broadcast only)

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

ON'OFF When the “Name” column is set in AV1, AV2 or AV3, On/Off setting is unavailable. You can also press [STTL ] to switch “STTL” setting. When there are multiple languages, select the subtitle (➡ 72, DVB Preferred Language).

HDD 30:24 SP DVD 1:58 SPRemain VHS

—:— —

TUE 14.10.08. 12:53:00

HDD 30:24 SP DVD 1:58 SPRemain VHS

Drive

—:— —

TUE 14.10.08. 12:53:00

Drive

minus one day

Programme Name

STTL

OFF

Programme Name

For Germany

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

Name

Date Start Stop Mode

14. 10. TUE

Name

Date Start Stop Mode

14. 10. TUE

SUN-SATJMON-SATJMON-FRI

SUNJ---JSAT

RENEW (Auto Renewal Recording) (➡ 31)

4 Press [OK].

The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is displayed.

RQT9090

Manually programming timer recordings

1 Press [PROG/CHECK].

Timer Recording

No. Name Date Start Stop

Timer Recording

No. Name Date

2 Press [

Programme” and press [OK].

HDD 30:24 SP DVD 1:58 SPRemain

—:— —

VHS

New Timer Programme

HDD 30:24 SP DVD 1:58 SPRemain VHS

New Timer Programme

e, r

TUE 14.10.08. 12:54:00

Drive

space

Mode

—:— —

Start

Drive

TUE 14.10.08. 12:54:00

Mode

Stop

For Germany

Drive

STTLDrive

space

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

] to select “New Timer

NameNo.

Timer icon

“z” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording standby has been activated.

: — —

TUE 14.10.08. 12:56:00

Stop

Drive

HDD

20:00

Programme

Mode

Drive

space

Check to make sure “OK” is displayed (➡ 32).

Repeat steps 2–4 to programme other recordings. Press [^ DVD/VHS] to turn the unit off.

ARD

Series recording

ABC1

1/2

21:30-22:30

12/26

21:30-22:30

12/19

21:30-22:30

12/12

21:30-22:30

12/05

21:30-22:30

Decameron 1

Decameron 2

Decameron 3

Decameron 4

Decameron 1

S R

22:3022:00

1 ARD

[GUIDE Plus+ system (➡ 21) only]

You can record all the episodes of a series by setting just one timer recording using the GUIDE Plus+ system.

After performing steps 1-2 (➡ 21)

Selection Screen

14.10.08 12:54:00

TUE

News & Factual TUE

RETURN

1 Press [

View Single Timer Rec.

Series Timer Rec.

Delete

Series Info

] to select “Series Timer

e, r

Rec.” and press [OK].

2 Press [OK].

Series recording icon

■ To check the schedule of the series

Press the “blue” button after performing steps 1-2 (➡ 21).

Series Information

Name Date Contents

Wed

The episode to be recorded Repeat programme

Note

y This unit automatically records the programmes that are identiﬁ ed

to be of the same series by the GUIDE Plus+ data.

y The series recording will be cancelled if there has been no

episode of the series for 13 weeks.

y Titles recorded using series recording are bundled and displayed

as a “group” in the Direct Navigator screen (➡ 35) except when using Auto Renewal Recording.

y If the unit cannot record the ﬁ rst run, the unit will record the repeat

programme if it is available. However, this unit will not record the repeat programme, if any part of the ﬁ rst run is recorded.

y You cannot change Name and Date in Timer Recording screen.

You can set the start time earlier and the end time later by some minutes, up to a maximum of 10 minutes.

To release the unit from recording standby

Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer recording list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].

1 Press [PROG/CHECK]. 2 Press [

and press the “Red” button.

y The timer icon “z” (➡ 30) disappears from the timer

recording list.

y You cannot cancel timer recording standby mode as long as

even one timer icon “z” (➡ 30) remains in the timer recording list.

y Press the “Red” button again to activate timer recording

standby.

Relief Recording

When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough remaining space, recording automatically switches to the “HDD”. If there is no disc in the tray or the disc cannot be recorded on or when timer recording starts while copying, the recording drive will be altered to the HDD. y The Direct Navigator shows which programmes were

relief-recorded (“

y If the time remaining on the HDD is insufﬁ cient, as much of the

programme as possible will be recorded onto the HDD.

Auto Renewal Recording

HDD

If you record a programme onto HDD repeatedly everyday or every week using timer recording, the unit will record the new programme over the old one.

This function can be used only when weekly recording or daily recording is selected.

] to select the programme

e, r

” is displayed.) (➡ 35).

1 Press [PROG/CHECK]. 2 Press [

and press [OK].

3 Press [

column.

4 Press [

[OK].

Timer Recording

Name

Date Start Stop Mode

SUN

All Services : ARD

] to select the programme

e, r

] to select “RENEW”

w, q

] to select “ON” and press

e, r

HDD 30:24 SP DVD 1:58 SPRemain VHS—:— —TUE 14.10.08. 12:53:00

RENEW

Drive

HDD

Programme Name

Advanced timer recording

To cancel recording when recording has already begun

Note

y If a programme set for Auto Renewal Recording is protected or

while playback is taking place from the HDD, or while copying, the programme will not be overwritten. Instead the programme set for

1 While the unit is on

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive and press [g].

Stop Recording

Timer recording in progress. Stop this timer recording? It will be cancelled if you stop.

Stop Recording Cancel

2 Press [

Recording” and press [OK].

If you stop a timer recording, it will be cancelled. However, if you have set a weekly, daily or series timer recording, the recording will start from the next time the timer recording is set.

SELECT

RETURN

] to select “Stop

w, q

recording will be saved as a separate programme, and this programme will be the one to be overwritten when the next Auto Renewal Recording takes place.

y Playlists made from programmes that were set for Auto Renewal

Recording are deleted along with auto renewal.

y When there is not enough space on the HDD, the programme may

not be recorded completely.

RQT9090

Advanced timer recording

Check, change or delete a programme, or resolve overlapping

y Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer

recording list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].

Press [PROG/CHECK].

Timer

Remain

Recording

No. Name

Press OK to store new programme.

A Icons

Timer recording standby is activated.

This programme is currently recording. Programmes are overlapped. Recording of the programme with the later start time starts when the earlier programme ﬁ nishes recording.

You stopped a weekly or daily timer recording. The icon disappears the next time the timer programme starts recording. The disc was full so the programme failed to record. The programme was copy-protected so it was not recorded. The programme did not complete recording because the disc is dirty or some other reason. Timer programmes set to Auto Renewal Recording (➡ 31). Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD (Displayed while recording.)

Drive Recording drive is set to HDD, DVD or VHS.

B Message displayed in the “Drive space” line

OK: Displayed if the recording can ﬁ t in the remaining

J (Date):

! : It may not be possible to record because:

– –: When the drive is set to VHS, “– –” is displayed. Relief: Timer programmes that will be relief recorded to

HDD DVD

space. For recordings made daily or weekly, the display will show until when recordings can be made (up to a maximum of one month from the present time) based on the time remaining on the

HDD DVD

disc.

– The disc is write-protected. – There is no more space left. – The number of possible titles has reached its

maximum.

– The new timer recording will completely or

partially record over this timer recording.

the HDD.

C Channel name, programme name and other

information are displayed.

HDD DVD 1:58 SP30:24 SP VHS TUE 14.10.08. 12:53:00

—:— —

Date Start Stop

New Timer Programme

RETURN

HDD DVD

Mode

Drive

DVD

HDD DVD

Drive space

■ To change a programme

Press [e, r] to select the programme and press [OK]. (➡ 30, right column, step 3)

■ To delete a programme

Press [e, r] to select the programme and press [DELETE ¼].

You can also delete a programme with the following steps

1 Press [e, r] to select the programme and press [OPTION]. 2 Press [e, r] to select “Delete” and press [OK].

■ To resolve overlapping

Press [e, r] to select the programme with and press [OK]. Then follow the on-screen instructions.

■ To exit the timer recording list

Press [PROG/CHECK].

Note

y Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer

recording list at 4 a.m. two days later.

y “-------” is displayed on a series recording item if there will be no

episode of the series for the next 8 days. We recommend you delete the “-------” item.

If the “Overlapped Timer Recording” screen appears

If you set a timer recording that will overlap with other timer recordings using the GUIDE Plus+ system, the “Overlapped Timer Recording” screen appears to help you resolve the overlapping. Follow the on-screen instructions.

Language for digital broadcast with multi-audio or multi-subtitle

In timer recording of digital broadcast with multi-audio or multi-subtitle, audio and subtitle language to be recorded will follow the setting of “DVB Preferred Language” in the Setup menu (➡ 72).

Notes on timer recording

y When a timer recording is set, DVDs that were recorded using a

different TV system cannot be played unless the TV system is changed in the Setup menu (➡ 75) or the timer recording has completed or has been cancelled.

y Timer recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit is

turned on/off.

y Timer recordings begin when the set time is reached even when

playing.

y Timer recordings do not begin while editing or copying in normal

speed mode (➡ 53).

y If the unit is turned on when timer recording begins, it remains

turned on after recording ﬁ nishes. It does not turn off automatically. You can turn the unit off during timer recording.

y If the unit is not put in the timer recording standby mode at the last

10 minutes before the programmed timer recording starting time, “z” ﬂ ashes on the unit’s display.

y When you programme successive timer recordings to start

immediately one after the other, the unit cannot record the part at the beginning of the later programmes.

ProgrammeProgramme

Not recorded

RQT9090

Recorded Recorded

y The “Overlapped Timer Recording” screen may be displayed

immediately after you turn on this unit, if new overlapping occurred. Refer to “Check, change or delete a programme, or resolve overlapping” (➡ left).

Operations in the TV Guide system

ABC 1 ABC 2 ITV 1 CH 111 five ITV 2 S4C

7 ITV 1

19:00 20:00

19:30 20:00 20:30 21:00

East

Hot Wars

Emm...

Scrapheap Car Show

News

Me out of here !

Red Cap

Holiday ...

The Bill

News

Pepsi Chart Show

Terminator 2

Pop Idol

Rugby

D.I.Y. SOS

Holiday Program

Coronation Street

Sex and...

15 to 1 Scrapheap C...

Basic operations

Press [GUIDE] to switch between Landscape view and Portrait view.

y Advertisement is not displayed if GUIDE Plus+ system (➡ 21) is

not available.

Landscape view

Wed 15.10.08 12:53

Portrait view

Wed 15.10.08 12:53

To change channels Landscape view

Press [e, r] to select a channel.

Portrait view

Press [w, q] to select a channel.

The TV Guide list appears for this channel.

To view a programme list for another day

y Jump ahead 24 hours

Press the “Green” button to jump ahead by one day.

y Jump back 24 hours

Press the “Red” button. You can only jump back to the current date. Past information cannot be viewed.

To browse through

Press [1 2 CH].

the TV Guide list To see programme

information

(Programmes with the

symbol)

Press [STATUS ]. Additional information (programme name, programme duration, broadcast time, description) is available for these programmes. Press [e, r] to scroll up and down.

To show other pages

Press [CH 1] (Previous) or [2 CH] (Next).

Press [STATUS programme list.

View advertisement

[GUIDE Plus+ system (➡ 21) only]

Press [OPTION]. The advertisement screen is displayed. y Some advertisements are for future

programmes and you can set the timer recording of the programmes using the advertisement screen. Follow the on-screen instructions.

y To display the latest advertisement, you

will need to update the information. To update the information continuously, this unit must be left in standby mode at night.

y If advertisement is not displayed

correctly, check the correct post code is entered in the Setup menu (➡ 78, Post Code).

To change advertisements

Press [e, r].

SELECT

RETURN

SELECT RETURN

TV Guide: Landscape

Wed 15.10

7 ITV 1

19:00 20:00

Emmerdale : In today,s show we will...

Time:

19:30 20:00 20:30 21:00

D.I.Y. SOS

East

ABC 1 ABC 2 ITV 1 CH 111 five ITV 2 S4C

+24 Hr

{OPTION: Select Advert

info

TV Guide: Portrait

Wed 15.10

13 Channel 4+1

19:30

20:00

20:55

21:00

22:00

23:00

00:05

+24 Hr

{OPTION: Select Advert

info

Hot Wars

Emm...

Coronation Street

Scrapheap Car Show

News

Sex and...

Me out of here !

Rugby

15 to 1 Scrapheap C...

Guide

Change Display Mode

More 4Channel 4

Hollyoaks Channel 4 News 3 Minute Wonder How to Look Good Naked The Secret Millionaire Love Trap

Guide

Change Display Mode

] again to return to the

All Types All Services

Holiday Program

All Types All Services

ITV 4 E4

Red Cap

Holiday ...

The Bill

Pepsi Chart Show

Terminator 2

News

Pop Idol

Proﬁ leProg. Type

Page +

Page –

Proﬁ leProg. Type

Page +

Page –

■ When the TV Guide displays “No info for analogue services” or the empty TV Guide list

TV Guide: Landscape

Wed 15.10

7 ITV 1

19:00 20:00

Time:

ABC 1 ABC 2 ITV 1

y Some digital broadcast may not send programme information. Set

the timer recording manually or with the SHOWVIEW system (➡ 30).

Selecting the programme from the desired programme type or proﬁ le

This function lets you display a TV Guide list sorted by programme type (e.g. Movies, Sport) or proﬁ le (e.g. TV, Radio).

All Types All Services

Emmerdale : In today’s show we will...

19:30 20:00 20:30 21:00

Hot Wars

Emm...

Holiday Program

Coronation Street

Holiday ...

The Bill

The “empty” ﬁ eld

1 From the desired programme type

Press the “Yellow” button to display the list of programme type.

From the desired proﬁ le

Press the “Blue” button to display the list of proﬁ les.

2 Press [

] to select the desired

e, r

item.

All Types

All Types Movies News Entertainment Sport

All Services

All Services TV Radio Proﬁ le 1 Proﬁ le 2 Proﬁ le 3

3 Press [OK].

y A list appears with all programmes of the selected item. y When you select the landscape view, the programmes that

belong to the selected programme type are highlighted.

e.g., Programme type, “News” is selected in step 2 of Landscape view.

Proﬁ leProg. Type

Note

Wed 15.10.08 12:53

TV Guide: Landscape

Wed 15.10

Time:

+24 Hr

All Types All Services

Emmerdale : In today’s show we will...

The broadcasters allocate individual programmes to topic areas. This function does not work properly unless the information which distinguishes the programme type and proﬁ les sent from broadcast stations is correct.

4 Press [

e, r, w, q

] to select the

programme.

To return to the previous TV Guide list before you have selected the programme type or proﬁ les

Select “All Types” of the programme type and “All Services” of the proﬁ les in step 2 above.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

TV Guide data download

In the area where GUIDE Plus+ system is available:

– Download manually from “GUIDE Plus+ Data Download Now” in

the Setup menu (➡ 78).

– Download automatically in standby mode*.

In the area where GUIDE Plus+ system is not available:

– Download automatically while the unit is on. – Download automatically in standby mode* if “TV Guide

Download in Standby” is set to “On” in the Setup menu (➡ 78).

* To select the time to download in standby mode (➡ 78, TV Guide/

Software search period)

Advanced timer recording

RQT9090

Advanced HDD or disc playback

Operation during play

y Depending on the media, some operations may not be possible.

Stop

Pause

Skip

Starting from a selected title

Quick View

HDD RAM

Slowmotion

HDD RAM -R

-R DL

-RW(V)

+R DL +RW

DVD-V

-RW(VR)

VCD

Frame-byframe

HDD RAM -R

-R DL

-RW(V)

+R DL +RW

DVD-V

-RW(VR)

VCD

Press [g].

The stopped position is memorized.

Resume play function

Press [q] (PLAY) to restart from this position.

Stopped position

y If [g] is pressed several times, the position is

cleared in some cases.

y The position is cleared if the tray is opened.

CD VCD

cleared if the unit is turned off.

and MP3/DivX : The position is

Press [h].

Press [h] again or [q] (PLAY) to restart play.

Press [t] or [y].

y The speed increases up to 5 steps.

+R +R DL +RW

(

y Press [q] (PLAY) to restart play. y Audio is heard during ﬁ rst level search

forward.

and MP3 : Audio is heard during all levels of search. DivX : Audio is not heard during all levels of search.

up to 3 steps)

During play or while paused, press [u] or [i].

Skip to the title, chapter or track you want to play.

y Each press increases the number of skips. y DivX : Press [u] to return to the beginning

of the title currently playing.

Press the numbered buttons.

Play starts from the selected title, chapter or track.

HDD

e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5] 15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]

y MP3 and JPEG

e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5] 15: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]

y Other discs

Input a 2-digit number e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [5] 15: [1] ➡ [5]

y This works only when stopped (the screen on

the right is displayed on the television) with some discs.

VCD

(with playback control) If you press the numbered buttons while stopped (the above screen is displayed on the television) you can cancel PBC. (Elapsed play time appears on the unit’s display.)

Press and hold [q] (PLAY).

Play speed is quicker than normal. y Press again to return to normal speed.

While paused, press [t] or [y].

The speed increases up to 5 steps. y Press [q] (PLAY) to restart play.

VCD

Forward direction [y] only.

y The unit will pause if slow-motion play is

continued for approximately 5 minutes (excluding

DVD-V VCD

While paused, press [w] (w h) or [q] (h q).

Each press shows the next frame. y Press and hold to change in succession

forward or backward.

y Press [q] (PLAY) to restart play.

VCD

Forward direction [q] (h q) only.

Skipping the speciﬁ ed time (Time Slip)

HDD RAM

-R DL -RW(V)

-R +R

+R DL

(This function does not work with ﬁ nalised discs.)

+RW -RW(VR)

Manual Skip

HDD RAM

-R DL -RW(V)

-R +R

+R DL

(This function does not work with ﬁ nalised discs.)

+RW -RW(VR)

Create Chapter

(➡ 46, Title/ Chapter)

HDD RAM

1 Press [TIME SLIP]. 2 Press [e, r] to select the time and

press [OK].

Play skips the speciﬁ ed time. y Each time you press [e, r], the time

increases [e] or decreases [r] by 1 minute intervals. (Press and hold for 10-minute intervals.)

This automatically disappears after approximately 5 seconds. To show the screen again press [TIME SLIP] again.

-5 min

Press [MANUAL SKIP].

Each time you press, play restarts approximately 1 minute later.

Press [CREATE CHAPTER].

Chapters are divided at the point pressed. y Press [u, i] to skip to the start of a

chapter.

y Chapters cannot be created during EXT LINK

standby.

Changing audio during play

Press [AUDIO].

HDD RAM -RW(VR) VCD

LRJLJR

HDD

PLAY

L R

e.g., “L R” is selected.

DVD- V

You can change the audio channel number each time you press the button. This allows you to change things like the soundtrack language (➡ 66, Soundtrack).

Soundtrack

e.g., English is selected.

Note

You cannot change the audio type in the following cases. y When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R

DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is selected.

y When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP

Recording” is set to “LPCM” (➡ 74).

y When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (The default

setting is “On”. ➡ 73).

, DivX and analogue broadcast

1 ENG

RQT9090

Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—Direct Navigator

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW -RW(VR)

You can quickly ﬁ nd the recorded titles and easily play them. You can also sort the titles or edit the Groups of titles.

1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

HDD RAM

button to select “VIDEO”.

2 Press [

and press [OK].

You can also select titles with the numbered buttons (All Titles screen only). e.g.,

5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5] 5: [0] ➡ [5] 15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5] 15: [1] ➡ [5] 115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]

To show other pages

Press [e, r, w, q] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK]. (Thumbnail Display only) y You can also press [u, i] to show other pages.

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Direct Navigator screen icons

(NTSC) (PAL)

Switching the Direct Navigator appearance

“Grouped Titles”/“All Titles” “Table Display”/“Thumbnail Display” 1 While the Direct Navigator screen is displayed

Press [OPTION].

2 Press [e, r] to select the item and press [OK].

e.g.,

Table Display

All Titles

PICTURE/MUSIC

Grouped Titles screen

Two or more titles recorded in the Daily/weekly timer recording mode are bundled and displayed as one item.

HDD

10.10.

Previous Next

OPTION

RETURN

(in Thumbnail Display)

Select the item marked with bundled titles.

When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”

e, r, w, q

HDD

] to select the title

RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW -RW(VR)

Currently recording. Title protected. Title that was not recorded due to recording

protection (Digital broadcasts etc.) Title cannot be played

[When copying a title to the HDD, or when data is damaged etc.]

Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD (➡ 31, Relief Recording)

Title with “One time only recording” restriction (➡ 96, CPRM)

Groups of titles (

HDD

only)

Title that was recorded but has not yet been played

HDD

(

only)

Title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV system currently selected on the unit. y Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit

(➡ 75).

HDD

“Table Display” or “Thumbnail Display”

HDD

Grouped TitlesDIRECT NAVIGATOR

11.10.

DolphinesChantal Show

Page

“Grouped Titles” or “All Titles”

VIDEO

PICTURE

MUSIC

02/02

Previous Next

Select

and press [OK] to display the

All Titles screen

Displays all titles.

HDD

007

RETURN

All TitlesDIRECT NAVIGATOR

008

- - -

Previous Next

OPTION

Page

Select

02/02

VIDEO

PICTURE

009

ARD 18.10. SATARD 11.10. SATARD 10.10. FRI

- - -- - -

Previous Next

MUSIC

(in Thumbnail Display)

To sort the titles for easy searching

HDD

(All Titles screen in Table Display only)

This function is convenient when searching for one title to playback from many titles.

1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [e, r] to select “Sort” and press [OK]. 3 Press [e, r] to select the item and press [OK].

If you select an item other than “No.” y The Direct Navigator screen will reappear after playback of the

selected title has ﬁ nished. (You cannot play titles continuously.)

y Skip and Time Slip will only function with the title currently being

played back.

y If you exit the Direct Navigator screen, or switch to another

Direct Navigator screen, the sort will be cancelled.

To play grouped titles

1 Press [e, r, w, q] to select the group and press [OK]. 2 Press [e, r, w, q] to select the title and press [OK].

To edit the group of titles

HDD

(Grouped Titles screen only)

1 Press [e, r, w, q] to select a title or a group and press [h].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items. y Press [h] to cancel.

2 Press [OPTION]. 3 Press [e, r] to select the option and press

[OK].

Create Group:

Press [w, q] to select “Create” and press [OK]. Selected titles are bundled to form a group.

Release Grouping:

Press [w, q] to select “Release” and press [OK]. y When a group of titles has been selected, all the titles in the group

are released.

y When a title in a group has been selected, the title is released

from the group.

■ Regarding the group name

The name of the ﬁ rst title in the group is used as the group name.

HDD

Grouped TitlesDIRECT NAVIGATOR

10.10.

11.10.

DolphinesChantal Show

Previous Next

OPTION

RETURN

To change the group name

1 Press [e, r, w, q] to select the group and press [OPTION]. 2 Press [e, r] to select “Edit” and press [OK]. 3 Press [e, r] to select “Enter Name” and press [OK]. 4 Enter the name. (➡ 52, Entering text) y Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group

will not be changed.

Page

Select

02/02

VIDEO

PICTURE

Previous Next

MUSIC

HDD

Grouped TitlesDIRECT NAVIGATOR

ARD 18.10. SAT

ARD 11.10.

Dolphines Dolphines

Previous Next

Page

OPTION

Select

01/01

RETURN

Create Group

Release Grouping

VIDEO

Advanced HDD or disc playback/Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—Direct Navigator

RQT9090

Playing DivX, MP3 and still pictures

CD(DivX/JPEG/MP3)

RETURN

Showing the menu screen

-R -R DL CD

1 Insert the disc.

2 If the disc contains different ﬁ le types

e.g.

Press [e, r] to select the item and press [OK].

Otherwise,

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

USB SD

1 Insert the USB memory or the SD card.

2 Press [e, r] to select the item and press [OK].

■ Changing the ﬁ le type to play

-R -R DL CD USB

1 Press [RETURN] several times to exit the menu. 2 Press [FUNCTION MENU].

-R -R DL CD

Press [e, r] to select “Playback” and press [OK].

USB

1 Press [e, r] to select “To Others” and press

[OK].

2 Press [e, r] to select “USB device” and press

[OK].

4 Press [e, r] to select the item and press [OK].

Disc

Play Video (DivX)

Play Pictures (JPEG)

Play Music (MP3)

Copy Music (MP3)

USB device

Play Video (DivX)

Play Pictures (JPEG)

Copy Pictures (JPEG)

Play Music (MP3)

Copy Music (MP3)

Update CD database on HDD

SELECT

RETURN

FUNCTION MENU

Playback

Recording

Copy

To Others

Play Mode : DivX

SD Card

Play Pictures (JPEG)

Copy Pictures (JPEG)

SELECT

RETURN

Playing DivX video contents

-R -R DL CD USB

You can play DivX video contents recorded with a computer onto DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.

1 Show DivX Menu screen.

(➡ left, Showing the menu screen)

DivX Menu

CD (DivX)

y Files are treated as titles.

2 Press [

press [OK].

Play starts on the selected title. y You can also select the title with the numbered buttons.

e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5] 15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]

To stop playing

Press [g].

To show other pages

Press [u, i].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Note

y Picture sizes set at the recording time may prevent the unit from

showing pictures in the adequate aspect. You may be able to adjust the aspect through the TV.

y Successive play is not possible. y Playback is not possible if recording is performed on the HDD

drive or the DVD drive.

Using the tree screen to ﬁ nd a folder

1 While the ﬁ le list is displayed

Press [q] while a title is highlighted to display the tree screen.

F: Selected folder no./Total folder no. including DivX title.

DivX Menu

CD (DivX)

RETURN

2 Press [e, r] to select a folder and press [OK].

The ﬁ le list for the folder appears.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

Folder1

Page Total Title

e, r

Folder

00025

001/001

: 001

] to select the title and

F 1/21

No. Name of Title Tree

001 ABC.avi

RETURN

12.02.2004

Image001 Image002 Image003 Image004 Image005 Image006 Image007 Image008 Image009 Image010

DATA1 DATA1

You cannot select folders that contain no compatible ﬁ les.

RQT9090

Regarding DivX VOD content

DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content is encrypted for copyright protection. In order to play DivX VOD content on this unit, you ﬁ rst need to register the unit. Follow the on line instructions for purchasing DivX VOD content to enter the unit’s registration code and register the unit. For more information about DivX VOD, visit www.divx.com/vod

Display the unit’s registration code.

(➡ 78, “DivX Registration” in “Others” tab)

Setup

Tuning Disc Picture Sound Display Connection VHS Others

y After playing DivX VOD content for the ﬁ rst time, another

registration code is then displayed in “DivX Registration”. Do not use this registration code to purchase DivX VOD content. If you use this code to purchase DivX VOD content, and then play the content on this unit, you will no longer be able to play any content that you purchased using the previous code.

y If you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code

different from this unit’s code, you will not be able to play this content. (“Authorisation Error.” is displayed.)

Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number of times

Some DivX VOD content can only be played a set number of times. When you play this content, the remaining number of plays is displayed. You cannot play this content when the number of remaining plays is zero. (“Rental Expired.” is displayed.)

When playing this content y The number of remaining plays is reduced by one if

– you press [^ DVD/VHS]. – you press [g]. – you press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR]. – you press [u] or [t, y] etc. and arrive at another content or

the start of the content being played. – timer recording starts on the HDD. – you press [DRIVE SELECT] to change the drive.

y Resume functions do not work.

DivX Registration

DivX (R) Video On Demand

Your registration code is : XXXXXXXX

To learn more visit www.divx.com/vod

RETURN

8 alphanumeric characters

Using the tree screen to ﬁ nd a group

1 While the ﬁ le list is displayed

Press [q] while a track is highlighted to display the tree screen.

Selected group No. /Total groups

If the group has no track, “– –” is displayed as group number.

MP3 Menu

G 8 T 14

TOTAL

40/111

Number

–

0 9

SELECT

RETURN

Group

MP3 music

001 My favorite 001 Brazilian pops 002 Chinese pops 003 Czech pops 004 Hungarian pops

005 Liner notes

006 Japanese pops

007 Mexican pops 008 Philippine pops 009 Swedish pops 001 Momoko 002 Standard number 001 Piano solo 002 Vocal

G 7/25

You cannot select groups that contain no compatible ﬁ les.

2 Press [e, r] to select a group and press [OK].

The ﬁ le list for the group appears.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

Playing DivX, MP3 and still pictures

Playing MP3 ﬁ les

-R -R DL CD USB

You can play MP3 ﬁ les recorded with a computer onto a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory. y You cannot play MP3 ﬁ les on the USB memory while recording or

copying.

1 Show MP3 Menu screen.

(➡ 36, Showing the menu screen)

Selected group

Group

MP3 Menu

G: Group No. T: Track No. in the group TOTAL:

Track No./Total tracks in all groups

G 1 T 1

TOTAL

1/111

Number

0 9

Prev.

SELECT

y Files are treated as tracks and folders are treated as

groups.

2 Press [

] to select the track and

e, r

press [OK].

Play starts on the selected track.

y “ ” indicates the track currently playing. y You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.

e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5] 15: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]

To stop playing

Press [g].

To show other pages

Press [u, i].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

No.

My favorite

1 :

001 Both Ends Freezing

002 Lady Starfish

003 Life on Jupiter

004 Metal Glue

005 Paint It Yellow

006 Pyjamamama

007 Shrimps from Mars

008 Starperson

009 Velvet Cuppermine

010 Ziggy Starfish

Page

Track

001/024

Tree

Tot al

–

RETURN

RQT9090

Playing DivX, MP3 and still pictures

Playing still pictures

HDD RAM -R -R DL CD USB SD

y You can play still pictures recorded with a computer onto a DVD-R,

DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.

y You cannot play still pictures while recording or copying. y Inserting, removing the SD card (➡ 17)

1 Show Album View screen.

-R -R DL CD USB SD

(➡ 36, Showing the menu screen)

HDD RAM

While stopped 1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive. 2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE”.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR

HDD

Album View

001

Date

- - -

RETURN

002

Total

Previous Next

OPTION

Date

: 1. 2.2006: 1. 1.2006

- - -

Page 01/01

Total

Slide Show

VIDEO

- - -

Press OK to show pictures.

Direct Navigator screen icons

Picture and folder protected.

Album that has not yet been viewed (

To show other pages

Press [e, r, w, q] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK]. y You can also press [u, i] to show other pages.

2 Press [

e, r, w, q

and press [OK].

You can also select album with the numbered buttons. e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5] 15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5] 115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]

DIRECT NAVIGATOR

HDD

Picture (JPEG) View

Album Name

103__DVD

0001

0002 0003 0004

0005 0006 0007 0008

0009

---- ---- ----

001/001

Page

Previous Next

RETURN

OPTION

Slide Show

Album View screen

MUSIC

PICTURE

Regarding Album View screen ➡ right

HDD RAM

] to select the album

e.g., HDD

PICTURE

)

■ Regarding Album View screen

Still pictures copied from USB memories and SD cards are grouped by the shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM. You can arrange these still pictures and create an album (➡ 50).

HDD RAM

Grouped by date

002

Total 68

Date: 10.10. 2007

Number of pictures/Shooting date

HDD RAM -R -R DL CD USB SD

Album

002

Total 2410.10. 07

Zoological park

Shooting date/Number of pictures/Album name y Depending on the digital camera, the editing software on the PC

etc., the information about the recording date may not be displayed. In this case, the date will appear as [--.--.--].

RQT9090

3 Press [

e, r, w, q

] to select the still

picture and press [OK].

You can also select still pictures with the numbered buttons. e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5] 115: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5] 15: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5] 1115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]

y Press [w, q] to display the previous or next still picture. y Useful functions during still picture play (➡ 39)

To return to the Album View screen or Picture (JPEG) View screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Useful functions during still picture play

Start Slide Show

Slide Show Setting

Rotate

Zoom in Zoom out

Properties

You can display still pictures one by one at a constant interval.

While the Album View screen is displayed

1 Press [e, r, w, q] to select the album. 2 Press [q] (PLAY).

You can also start Slide Show with the following steps.

While the Album View screen is displayed

1 Press [e, r, w, q] to select the desired album and press [OPTION]. 2 Press [e, r] to select “Start Slide Show” and press [OK].

y To change the display interval

1 Press [e, r] to select “Slide Show Setting” in step 2 and press [OK]. 2 Press [e, r] to select “Display interval”. 3 Press [w, q] to select the desired interval (0–30 seconds) and press [OK].

y Repeat Play

1 Press [e, r] to select “Slide Show Setting” in step 2 and press [OK]. 2 Press [e, r] to select “Repeat Play”. 3 Press [w, q] to select “On” or “Off ” and press [OK].

While playing

Start Slide Show

Slide Show Setting

1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [e, r] to select “Rotate RIGHT” or “Rotate LEFT” and press [OK].

y Rotation information will not be stored.

-R -R DL CD USB

– – When disc or album is protected – When played on other equipment – When copying pictures – When changing date

y If you remove the SD card while the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed, picture rotation information may not

be properly stored. Remove the SD card after you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.

While playing

Still pictures

1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [e, r] to select “Zoom in” and press [OK].

y To return the picture to its original size, press [e, r] to select “Zoom out” in step 2 and press [OK]. y When zooming in, the picture may be cut off. y The enlargement information will not be stored. y The “Zoom in/Zoom out” function is only available for still pictures smaller than 640 × 480 pixels.

While playing

Press [STATUS ] twice.

To exit the picture properties screen

Press [STATUS

e.g., HDD

18:53:50 11.10.

Folder - Picture No. 103 - 0006

1.1.2005

Date

Shooting date

Rotate RIGHT

Rotate LEFT

Rotate RIGHT

Rotate LEFT

Zoom in

No. 3 / 9

RETURN

Playing DivX, MP3 and still pictures

RQT9090

Advanced video cassette playback

Operations

Stop

Pause

Fast-forward/Rewind

Cue/Review

Jet Search

Slow

Jet Rewind

Repeat Playback

Press [g]. Press [h].

Press [h] again or [q] (PLAY) to restart play.

While stopped

Press [t] (backward)/[y] (forward).

During play

Tap or keep pressing [t] (backward)/[y] (forward).

y If you keep pressing these buttons, normal playback restarts by releasing them. y Tap [q] (PLAY) to restart normal playback.

During play

Tap [t] (backward)/[y] (forward) twice. You can increase Cue/Review search speed.

y Press [q] (PLAY) to restart normal playback. y You can select search speed to view the recorded picture. y The picture recorded in EP or AUTO mode may be distorted if it is played at approx. 35 times speed.

A vertical scroll may occur. It is not a malfunction but if it happens, change to approx. 27 times speed.

y The picture may not be in colour or may be distorted depending on the TV.

During play

Press and hold [h] for about 2 seconds or more.

y Press [q] (PLAY) to restart normal playback.

To perform a Higher Speed Rewind

Press [t JET REW].

y Depending on the tape or an operating condition,

the rewind speed may change somewhat.

y The tape counter is reset to “0:00.00” when the tape is rewound to the beginning. y Depending on the tape, this function may not work.

During play or while stopped

REC

Keep pressing [q] (PLAY) for about 5 or more seconds.

y The “R q” indication appears on the TV screen. y At the end of the programme, the tape rewinds to the beginning and plays it again (it only works if

there is at least 5 seconds blank space at the end of the programme). This repeats until you make another operation.

y Press [q] (PLAY) to restart normal playback.

RQT9090

Adjusting the playback picture

Manual tracking

The unit usually makes tracking adjustments, but you may need to do it manually if noise appears on a tape recorded on other equipment.

During play

Press [TRACKING/V-LOCK +] or [TRACKING/V-LOCK –].

Repeat until the noise disappears.

To return to auto tracking

Press both [TRACKING/V-LOCK +] and [TRACKING/V-LOCK –] simultaneously.

To remove the noise from a paused picture

Start slow play, then adjust the tracking.

Note

y This function may not work with some tapes. y You can also adjust the tracking with [CH 1 2] on the main unit.

Vertical locking adjustment

Adjust the vertical synchronization to stop the picture from jiggling while paused.

While paused

Press [TRACKING/V-LOCK +] or [TRACKING/V-LOCK –].

Repeat until the jiggling stops.

To return to the standard position

Press both [TRACKING/V-LOCK +] and [TRACKING/V-LOCK –] simultaneously.

Note

y This function may not work with some tapes. y You can also adjust the vertical synchronization with [CH 1 2] on

the main unit.

Changing audio

During play

Press [AUDIO].

The audio changes as follows: LR (Stereo) J L J R J No display (Normal audio track)

S-VHS Quasi Playback (SQPB)

It is also possible to play back tapes recorded in the S-VHS system. y Some picture noise may occur depending on the type of tape

used.

y It is not possible to fully obtain the high resolution that S-VHS is

capable of.

y It is not possible to record in the S-VHS system with the unit.

Advanced video cassette playback

VHS Index Search System (VISS)

The unit automatically records special index signals on the tape every time a recording is started (via [* REC], or timer recording). The index search function makes use of these index signals to let you ﬁ nd the beginning of a desired programme quickly and easily.

While stopped or during normal play

Press [

y Each press increases the number of skips.

To cancel the index search

Press [g].

Note

y Up to 20 index signals can be searched for in both directions. y If you press either one of the buttons too much, you can control

the number of skips by pressing the opposite button.

y This feature may not work correctly if the index signals are too

close together. Make recordings of at least 5 minutes.

] or [

VHS cassette

RQT9090

Playing music

To play music CD

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

1 Insert a music CD.

The menu is automatically displayed.

Play Music

Copy Music

SELECT

RETURN

2 Press [

] to select “Play Music”

e, r

and press [OK].

The unit starts accessing the Gracenote® Database (➡ 64) and searches for the title information.

If search results indicate that multiple titles were found

Press [e, r] to select the appropriate title and press [OK].

3 Press [

] to select the track and

e, r

press [OK].

You can also select the track with the numbered buttons. e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [5] 15: [1] ➡ [5]

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR]. Playback continues.

To play music recorded on HDD

Copying music to HDD (➡ 64)

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.

1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to select “MUSIC”.

2 Press [

HDD” or “Play MP3 on HDD” and press [OK].

Please select music to play.

Play MP3 on HDD

3 Press [

group and press [OK].

You can also select the album/group with the numbered buttons. e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5] 15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5] 115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]

] to select “Play CD on

e, r

Play Music

Play CD on HDD

SELECT

RETURN

] to select the album/

e, r

4 Press [

] to select the track and

e, r

press [OK].

You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.

e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [5] 15: [1] ➡ [5]

MP3

e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5] 115: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5] 15: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5] 1115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Note

y You cannot play music tracks on HDD while recording or copying. y When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes while

the screen is being displayed, the screen saver is displayed. To return to the previous screen, press [OK].

Useful functions during music play

Operations during play

Stop

Pause

Skip

Repeat Play

HDD

Sort

HDD

Properties

HDD CD

Press [g].

The stopped position is memorized. Press [q] (PLAY) to restart from this position. y If [g] is pressed several times, the position is

cleared.

y The position is cleared if the unit is turned off.

Press [h].

Press [h] again or [q] (PLAY) to restart play.

Press [t] or [y].

The speed increases up to 5 steps. Press [q] (PLAY) to restart play.

During play or while paused, press [u] or [i].

Skip to the track you want to play. y Each press increases the number of skips.

You can select the item which you want to repeat.

While playing 1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [e, r] to select “Repeat Play Setting” and

press [OK].

3 Press [e, r] to select the item and press [OK]. y Select “Off” to cancel repeat play.

You can change the order of the Album View (CD)/ Group View (MP3) alphabetically.

While Album View (CD) screen or Group View (MP3) screen is displayed 1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [e, r] to select “Sort” and press [OK]. 3 Press [e, r] to select “Album Name” or “Group

Name” and press [OK].

To cancel the sorted screen

Press [e, r] to select “No.” and press [OK]. While Track View (CD) screen or Track View (MP3)

screen is displayed 1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [e, r] to select “Properties” and press

[OK].

y To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].

RQT9090

Convenient functions

FUNCTION MENU window

By using the FUNCTION MENU window you may access the main functions quickly and easily.

1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].

Functions displayed depend on the selected drive or type of disc.

FUNCTION MENU

Remain

HDD

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

To Others

RETURN

2 Press [

e, r

press [OK].

y If you select “To Others” and press [OK], the following

screen appears. Press [e, r] to select an item and press [OK].

FUNCTION MENU

HDD

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

To Others

RETURN

y If you press [RETURN], you can return to the previous

screen.

Playback You can select and play recorded

Recording You can easily ﬁ nd programmes you want

Delete You can delete items using DELETE

Copy You can copy recorded titles using COPY

Timer Recording You can start programming timer

HOWVIEW Record You can make timer recording setting by

Advanced Copy You can make a copying list and then copy

Copy New Pictures You can copy the new still pictures on an

Playlists You can create playlists by grouping your

Flexible Rec The unit sets the best possible picture

DV Auto Rec

Setup You can change the unit’s settings using

HDD Management DVD Management Card Management

Copy Music CD You can copy music CD to the HDD

USB device This unit displays the menu to help you

30:00 SP

] to select an item and

Remain

30:00 SP

Timer Recording

ShowView Record

Advanced Copy

Playlists

Flexible Rec

DV Auto Rec

Setup

HDD Management

programmes (➡ 19, 35), change the Play Mode (DivX, JPEG, MP3) (➡ 36), etc.

to watch and set them for timer recording (➡ 21).

Navigator (➡ 22, 51).

Navigator (➡ 55).

recording (➡ 30).

entering SHOWVIEW numbers (➡ 30).

(➡ 58, 62).

SD card (➡ 62).

favourite chapters (➡ 48).

quality that ﬁ ts the recording within the remaining disc space (➡ 26).

DV automatic recording function (➡ 29)

Setup menu (➡ 71). You can manage the HDD, discs and

cards through formatting, ﬁ nalising and other operations (➡ 68).

(➡ 64).

start USB operations (➡ 36). y “USB device” appears when a

compatible USB device is connected.

To pause the TV programme you are watching—Pause Live TV

You can pause the TV programme you are watching using this unit’s tuner and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is useful when you have to brieﬂ y stop watching TV to run an errand. If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.

1 Turn on the television and select the

appropriate AV input to suit the connections to this unit.

2 Turn on this unit and press [

1 2

CH]

to select the channel.

3 When you want to pause the TV programme

Press [h].

HDD

4 DVB

ABC

L R

This icon indicates that Pause Live TV is working. You can turn off this icon (➡ 74, Pause Live TV Icon).

4 When you want to resume

Press [q] (PLAY).

y The programme is saved on the HDD in SP recording mode

(➡ 24) regardless of the recording mode and the drive selected before starting saving.

y At least 1 hour up to 8 hours of TV programmes can be

temporarily saved on the HDD. (This may vary depending on the HDD free space.)

Operation during Pause Live TV

Search Pause

Quick View

Slowmotion

Stop Pause Live TV

Note

y The Pause Live TV function automatically stops when a timer

recording starts.

y The Pause Live TV function does not work if the clock is not set. y The Pause Live TV function does not work

–while recording –while timer recording –while EXT LINK recording, etc.

y You cannot change audio or subtitle during resume play. y The ﬁ rst 30 minutes is deleted every 30 minutes after the HDD is

full or the saving lasts 8 hours.

y The Pause Live TV function stops automatically 24 hours after

started.

y “DVB Multi Audio” and “DVB Subtitle” of on-screen menu cannot

be switched during Pause Live TV.

Press [t, y].

Press [h].

y Press [q] (PLAY) to restart.

Press and hold [q] (PLAY).

y Press again to return to the normal speed.

While paused, press [t] or [y].

The speed increases up to 5 steps. y Press [q] (PLAY) to restart play.

1 Press [g]. 2 Press [w, q] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

Playing music/Convenient functions

To exit the FUNCTION MENU window

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

RQT9090

Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI Control™”/Q Link)

You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and receiver by using “HDAVI Control” or Q Link.

What is VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”?

VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” is a convenient function that offers linked operations of this unit, and a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or receiver under “HDAVI Control”. You can use this function by connecting the equipment with the HDMI cable. See the operating instructions for connected equipment for operational details.

y VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”, based on the control functions

provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), is a unique function that we have developed and added. As such, its operation with other manufacturers’ equipment that supports HDMI CEC cannot be guaranteed.

y This unit supports “HDAVI Control 3” function.

“HDAVI Control 3” is the newest standard (current as of December, 2007) for Panasonic’s HDAVI Control compatible equipment. This standard is compatible with Panasonic’s conventional HDAVI equipment.

y Please refer to individual manuals for other manufacturers’

equipment supporting VIERA Link function.

Preparation

1 Connect this unit to your TV using an HDMI cable and a fully

wired 21-pin Scart cable (➡ 11), or to your receiver using an

HDMI cable (➡ 83). 2 Set “VIERA Link” to “On” (➡ 75). (The default setting is “On”.) 3 Set the “HDAVI Control” operations on the connected equipment

(e.g., TV).

y Set the input channel on VIERA to suit the terminal to be

used as “HDAVI Control”.

4 Turn on all “HDAVI Control” compatible equipment and select this

unit’s input channel on the connected TV so that the “HDAVI

Control” function works properly.

Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat

this procedure.

What is Q Link?

Q Link is a convenient function that offers linked operations of this unit and a Panasonic TV. You can use this function by connecting the equipment with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable.

Preparation

y Connect this unit to your TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable

(➡ 10).

For your reference

The following systems from other manufacturers have similar function to Q Link from Panasonic. For details, refer to your television’s operating instructions or consult your dealer.

y Q Link (registered trademark of Panasonic) y DATA LOGIC (registered trademark of Metz) y Easy Link (registered trademark of Philips) y Megalogic (registered trademark of Grundig) y SMARTLINK (registered trademark of Sony)

What you can do with “HDAVI Control” and Q Link

Download from the TV

VIERA Link

(When the TV is on)

Q Link

Easy playback

VIERA Link Q Link

(When the TV is off)

Power on link

VIERA Link Q Link

Power off link

VIERA Link Q Link

Direct TV Recording

VIERA Link

This button is available only when this unit is on.

When this button is pressed, the playback image is not immediately displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to watch the contents

from where playback started. In this case, press [u] or [t] to go back to where playback started.

*3 This function is available with the TV which has “HDAVI Control 3” function.

Note

y These functions may not work normally depending on the equipment condition. y About “HDAVI Control” function, read the manual of the connected equipment (e.g., TV) too.

Q Link

When you connect the unit to a TV for the ﬁ rst time, the station list data is automatically copied from the TV to the unit and the TV stations are assigned to the programme positions on the unit in the same order as on the TV (➡ 12).

When the TV is on and the following operations are performed, the TV’s input will automatically switch to HDMI input mode ( (Picture or sound may not be available for the ﬁ rst few seconds.)

Press [FUNCTION MENU]* CHECK] etc.

When the TV is off and the following operations are performed, the TV will automatically turn on and display the corresponding action. (Picture or sound may not be available for the ﬁ rst few seconds.)

Press [FUNCTION MENU]* CHECK] etc.

DVD-V CD VCD

The TV is automatically turned on when you insert the discs.

When you set the TV to standby mode, the unit is also automatically set to standby mode. The unit is automatically set to standby mode even if the FUNCTION MENU screen etc. is displayed during playback or when the unit set to a timer recording. Even if the TV is set to standby mode, the unit will not be set to standby mode at the same time when recording, copying, ﬁ nalising etc. y When this unit is connected to an “HDAVI Control” compatible Panasonic receiver with an HDMI cable,

the receiver will also turn off.

This function allows you to immediately start recording the programme that you are viewing on the TV.

y However this function does not work if you select the TV channels on this unit.

VIERA Link

SVCD and MP3

) or AV input mode (

, [q] (PLAY)*2, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [ShowView], [PROG/

Q Link

) and the TV displays the corresponding action.

Press and hold [* DIRECT TV REC] for 1 second.

Recording starts. y The titles are recorded to the HDD.

To stop recording

Press [g].

RQT9090

Easy control only with VIERA remote control

RETURN

If you connect this unit to the TV that has “HDAVI Control 2” or “HDAVI Control 3” function with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy using more convenient functions. You can operate this unit using the following buttons on the TV remote control. [e, r, w, q], [OK], [RETURN], [EXIT], [OPTION] and the coloured buttons. Use the remote control for this unit to operate any other buttons (numbered buttons, etc.) that are not listed above.

y The operation of this unit may be interrupted when you press buttons on the TV remote control other than those listed above. y The TV displays the TV tuner’s picture when the linked operation is ﬁ nished.

Using the FUNCTION MENU window to operate this unit

VIERA Link

y This function is available with the

TV which has “HDAVI Control 2” or “HDAVI Control 3” function.

Pause live TV programme

VIERA Link

y This function is available with the

TV which has “HDAVI Control 3” function.

Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unit

VIERA Link

y This function is available with the

TV which has “HDAVI Control 2” or “HDAVI Control 3” function.

Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.

1 Display this unit’s “FUNCTION MENU” window

using the TV remote control.

y If this unit is set to standby mode, it will automatically turn on.

2 Select the item you want to operate with the TV

remote control, and press [OK].

HDD

FUNCTION MENU

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

To Others

RETURN

Remain

30:00 SP

About the FUNCTION MENU window (➡ 43).

You can pause the TV programme you are watching and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is useful when you have to brieﬂ y stop watching TV to run an errand. If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.

Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.

1 When you want to pause the TV programme

Turn on the “Pause Live TV” function using the TV remote control.

y This unit turns on automatically.

2 When you want to resume

Display the Control Panel (➡ below) and press [OK].

y The TV programme resumes.

To stop Pause Live TV

Press [r] while the Control Panel is displayed.

Refer to “Note” on page 43, “To pause the TV programme you are watching—Pause Live TV”.

By using the TV remote control, you can play discs using the “Control Panel” (➡ below) and display the Top Menu for DVD-Video.

1 Press [OPTION].

e,g.,

Control Panel

FUNCTION MENU

Top Menu

Drive Select

Note

You cannot use the OPTION menu while the Top Menu for DVD-Video is displayed and while DVD-Video is copied.

2 Select an item then press [OK].

Control Panel Control Panel is displayed

(➡ below).

FUNCTION MENU

Top Menu

DVD-V

DVD- V

FUNCTION MENU window is displayed (➡ above).

Top menu is displayed (➡ 19).

Menu is displayed (➡ 19).

Drive Select Select the HDD, DVD or SD

drive.

Rotate RIGHT

Rotate the still picture (➡ 39).

(JPEG) Rotate LEFT

(JPEG) Zoom in

(JPEG)

Enlarge or shrink the still picture (➡ 39).

Zoom out (JPEG)

”/Q Link)

Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI Control

Using the Control Panel

Using the Control Panel, you can operate search backward, search forward, stop, etc, with the TV remote control. Perform steps 1 and 2 of “Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unit” (➡ above).

The Control Panel is displayed (➡ right). y When playing a title or DVD-Video, etc.

– [e]: Pause, [r]: Stop, [w]: Search backward, [q]: Search forward,

[OK]: Play, [EXIT]: Exit the screen.

y While playing still pictures

– [r]: Stop, [w]: View previous picture, [q]: View next picture,

[EXIT]: Exit the screen.

■ When you want to leave the TV on and set only this unit to standby mode

Press [^ DVD/VHS] on this unit’s remote control and set to standby mode.

■ When not using “HDAVI Control”

Set “VIERA Link” in the Setup menu to “Off ” (➡ 75).

Control Panel

Pause

Play

Stop

Exit

SearchSearch

RQT9090

Editing titles/chapters

------ ---

HDD

0:31.24

HDD RAM

-R

-R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL

+RW -RW(VR)

(You cannot edit ﬁ nalised discs.)

Title/Chapter

Programmes are recorded as a single title consisting of one chapter.

Title

Chapter

Start End

HDD RAM

You can divide a title into multiple chapters. Each section between the division points becomes a chapter. (➡ 34, 47, Create Chapter)

Title

Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter

HDD RAM

You can change the order of chapters and create a playlist (➡ 48).

y The maximum number of items on a disc:

HDD

– Titles: 499 – Chapters: Approx. 1000 per title

(Depends on the state of recording.)

RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

– Titles: 99 ( – Chapters: Approx. 1000 (

+R +R DL +RW

49 titles)

+R +R DL +RW

Approx. 254)

(Depends on the state of recording.)

Note

y Once deleted, divided or partially deleted, recorded content

cannot be restored to its original state. Make certain before proceeding.

y You cannot edit during recording or copying, etc. y Restricted recording information remains even after editing (e.g.

dividing a title etc).

+R +R DL

Each time you edit a title the information is saved to the free space on the disc. If you do this numerous times, the amount of free space decreases. We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to disc.

Editing titles/chapters and playing chapters

You can modify (remove unnecessary parts, divide, etc.) recorded programmes.

Preparation

y Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit

the connection to this unit.

y Turn the unit on. y Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded

title to be edited.

RAM

Release protection (➡ 68, Setting the protection).

1 During play or while stopped

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

HDD RAM

button to select “VIDEO”.

2 Press [

HDD

To show other pages

Press [e, r, w, q] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK]. y You can also press [u, i] to show other pages.

Multiple editing

Select with [e, r, w, q] and press [h]. (Repeat.) A check mark appears. Press [h] again to cancel.

When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”

e, r, w, q

Grouped TitlesDIRECT NAVIGATOR

008

ARD 10.10. ARD 11.10.

Previous NextPage

OPTION

RETURN

Select

02/02

] to select the title.

PICTURE

MUSIC

Title View screen

VIDEO

Previous Next

3 Press [OPTION]. 4 Press [

and press [OK].

y If you select “Edit”, press [e, r] to select the operation and

press [OK].

Delete

Properties

Edit

Create Group

Release Grouping

Chapter View

Table Display

All Titles

PICTURE/MUSIC

■ If you select “Chapter View”

5 Press [

chapter.

To start play ➡ Press [OK]. To edit ➡ Step 6.

008 ARD 11.10.

] to select the operation

e, r

Enter Name

Set up Protection

Cancel Protection

Partial Delete

Change Thumbnail

Divide Title

To edit the group of titles

Switching the Direct Navigator appearance (➡ 35)

y Playing still pictures (➡ 38) y To play music recorded on HDD

(➡ 42)

e, r, w, q

Chapter ViewDIRECT NAVIGATOR

] to select the

VIDEO

Chapter View screen

Refer to “Title operations” (➡ 47).

HDD

(➡ 35)

RQT9090

y To show other pages/Multiple editing (➡ above)

6 Press [OPTION], then [

e, r

] to select

the operation and press [OK].

Delete Chapter

Create Chapter

Combine Chapters

Title View

y You can go back to Title View.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Refer to “Chapter operations” (➡ 47).

Title operations

026

ARD

12:19 0:30 (SP)

0:00.00

- -:- -.- -

HDD

008

ENTER

0:43.21

008

- -:- -.- -

Divide

HDD

0:43.21

008

HDD

After performing steps 1–4 (➡ 46)

Delete*

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

Properties

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R

+R DL +RW -RW(VR)

Press [w, q] to select “Delete” and press [OK].

y Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding. y The available recording space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL does not increase when you delete

titles.

y Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW increases only when the last

recorded title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted (➡ 22).

Information (e.g., time and date) is shown. y Press [OK] to exit the screen.

Dinosaur

No. Date

11.10.2006 MON

Name

Properties

Time Rec time

Enter Name

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R

+R DL +RW

Set up Protection* Cancel Protection*

HDD RAM +R +R DL +RW

Partial Delete

HDD RAM

(➡ below, For your reference)

Change Thumbnail

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R

+R DL +RW

(➡ below, For your reference)

Divide Title

HDD RAM

(➡ below, For your reference)

* Multiple editing is possible.

You can give names to recorded titles. (➡ 52, Entering text)

HDD

Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will not be changed.

If set, this will protect the title from accidental deletion.

Press [w, q] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

The lock symbol appears when the title is protected.

You can remove unnecessary part of the recording.

1 Press [OK] at the start point and end point of the

section you want to delete.

2 Press [e, r] to select “Finish” and press [OK].

y Select “Next” and press [OK] to delete other sections.

3 Press [w, q] to select “Delete” and press [OK].

You can change an image to be shown as the thumbnail picture in the Title View.

1 Press [q] (PLAY) to start play. 2 Press [OK] when the image you want to use as a

thumbnail is shown.

To change the thumbnail

DIRECT NAVIGATOR

HDD

008

RETURN

DIRECT NAVIGATOR

007 008

ARD 10.10. FRI ARD 11.10. MON

Partial DeleteDIRECT NAVIGATOR

Start End

- -:- -.- - - -:- -.- -

Change Thumbnail

Change

VIDEO

PLAY

Start End Next Finish

0:43.21

VIDEO

Change

Finish

Start play and select the image of a thumbnail.

Restart play and press [e, r] to select “Change”, then press [OK] at the point you want to change.

3 Press [e, r] to select “Finish” and press [OK].

You can divide a title into two.

1 Press [OK] at the point you want to divide the title. 2 Press [e, r] to select “Finish” and press [OK]. 3 Press [w, q] to select “Divide” and press [OK].

To conﬁ rm the division point

Press [e, r] to select “Preview” and press [OK]. (The unit plays 10 seconds before and after the division point.)

To change the division point

Restart play and press [e, r] to select “Divide”, then press [OK] at the point where you want to divide the title.

Note

y The divided titles retain the title name and CPRM property (➡ 96) of the original title. y Video and audio just before and after the dividing point may momentarily cut out.

HDD

Divided titles form a group of titles.

Divide TitleDIRECT NAVIGATOR

VIDEO

PLAY

Preview Divide

Finish

Editing titles/chapters

All Titles

Chapter operations

After performing steps 1–6 (➡ 46)

Delete Chapter*

HDD RAM

Create Chapter

HDD RAM

(➡ below, For your reference)

Combine Chapters

HDD RAM

* Multiple editing is possible.

For your reference

y Use Search (➡ 34), Time Slip (➡ 34) to ﬁ nd the desired point. y To ﬁ nd the desired point correctly, use Slow-motion (➡ 34) and Frame-by-frame (➡ 34). y To skip to the start or end of a title, press [u] (start) or [i] (end).

Press [w, q] to select “Delete” and press [OK].

y Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding. y Select “Combine Chapters” (➡ below) when you only want to delete the division point between chapters.

(The recorded contents will not be deleted.)

Select the point where you want to start a new chapter while viewing the title.

1 Press [OK] at the point you want to divide.

y Repeat this step to divide at other points.

2 Press [e, r] to select “Finish” and press [OK].

Press [w, q] to select “Combine” and press [OK].

y The selected chapter and following chapter are combined.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR

Create Chapter

PLAY

VIDEO

Create

Finish

RQT9090

Creating, editing and playing playlists

- -

HDD

- -

- -- -

- -

001

002 003

---

------------

001 002

HDD

------

001/001

RETURN

You can arrange the chapters (➡ 46) to create a playlist.

Title

Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter

Playlist

Chapter Chapter

Copying (➡ 53) a playlist will create a title. y Playlists are not recorded separately so this doesn’t use much

capacity.

y Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles

and source chapters.

y You cannot create or edit playlists while recording or copying.

HDD RAM

y The maximum number of items on a disc:

– Playlists: 99 – Chapters in playlists: Approx. 1000

(Depends on the state of recording.) y If you exceed the maximum numbers of items for a disc, all the

items entered will not be recorded.

Creating playlists

HDD RAM

Preparation

y Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit

the connection to this unit.

y Turn the unit on. y Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded

title to be edited.

RAM

Release protection (➡ 68, Setting the protection).

y You cannot create or edit a playlist while recording or while

copying.

y Playlists must be made in accordance with the encoding system

currently selected in “TV System” (➡ 75).

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [

press [OK].

FUNCTION MENU

HDD

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

To Others

] to select “To Others” and

e, r

30:00 SP

Remain

Timer Recording

ShowView Record

Advanced Copy

Playlists

Flexible Rec

DV Auto Rec

Setup

HDD Management

RETURN

5 Press [

] to select the source title

w, q

and press [r].

y Press [OK] to select all the chapters in the title, then skip to

step 7.

CreatePlaylists

HDD

001 ARD 11.10. SAT

Source Title

001

Source Chapter

001

Chapters in Playlist

OPTION

RETURN

6 Press [

002

002 003

---

Press RETURN to ﬁ nish.

w, q

Page

001/001

------

Page

001/001

---

Page

001/001

---------

] to select the chapter you want to add to a playlist and press [OK].

Press [e] to cancel.

CreatePlaylists

HDD

001 ARD 11.10. SAT

Source Title

001

Source Chapter

001

Chapters in Playlist

OPTION

RETURN

002

002 003

Press RETURN to ﬁ nish.

Page

001/001

------

Page

001/001

---

Page

001/001

------------

y You can also create a new chapter from the source title.

Press [OPTION] to select “Create Chapter” and press [OK] (➡ 47, Create Chapter).

7 Press [

] to select the position to

w, q

insert the chapter and press [OK].

CreatePlaylists

001 ARD 11.10. SAT

Source Title

Source Chapter

Chapters in Playlist

Press RETURN to ﬁ nish.

Page

y Press [e] to select other source titles. y Repeat steps 6–7 to add other chapters.

8 Press [RETURN].

All the selected chapters become the playlist.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

RQT9090

3 Press [

press [OK].

4 Press [

and press [OK].

e, r

e, r, w, q

Playlist ViewPlaylists

Create

] to select “Playlists” and

] to select “Create”

Editing and playing playlists/chapters

- -- -

- -- -- -

HDD

001

--- ---

--- ------ ---

002

HDD

0:19.36

0:10.24

HDD RAM

-RW(VR)

(Play only)

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [

press [OK].

3 Press [

press [OK].

4 Press [

playlist.

To start play ➡ Press [OK]. To edit ➡ Step 5.

Playlists

12.10. SUN 0:30

y To show other pages/Multiple editing (➡ 46)

5 Press [OPTION], then [

the operation and press [OK].

y If you select “Edit”, press [e, r] to select the operation and

press [OK].

Delete

Properties

Edit

Chapter View

■ If you select “Chapter View”

6 Press [

chapter.

To start play ➡ Press [OK]. To edit ➡ Step 7.

Playlists

01 ARD 12.10. SUN 0:30

y To show other pages/Multiple editing (➡ 46)

7 Press [OPTION], then [

the operation and press [OK].

Add Chapter

Move Chapter

Create Chapter

Combine Chapters

Delete Chapter

Playlist View

] to select “To Others” and

e, r

] to select “Playlists” and

e, r

e, r, w, q

Playlist View

Create

] to select the

Playlist View screen

e, r

Create

Copy

Enter Name

Change Thumbnail

e, r, w, q

Chapter View

] to select the

Chapter View screen

Refer to “Playlist operations” (➡ right).

e, r

Refer to “Chapter operations” (➡ right).

] to select

Playlist operations

After performing steps 1–5 (➡ left)

Delete*

HDD RAM

Press [w, q] to select “Delete” and press [OK]. Once deleted, the playlists are lost and cannot be restored.

Make certain before proceeding.

Properties

HDD RAM

-RW(VR)

Create

HDD RAM

Copy*

HDD RAM

Playlist information (e.g., total time and date) is shown. y Press [OK] to exit the screen.

Properties

Dinosaur

Date 12.10.2006 TUE

No. Chapters

Total 0:30.53

002

RETURN

(➡ 48, Creating playlists, steps 5–8)

Press [w, q] to select “Copy” and press [OK].

y The copied playlist becomes the newest one

in the Playlist View screen.

Enter Name

HDD RAM

Change

You can give names to playlists. (➡ 52, Entering text)

(➡ 47, Change Thumbnail)

Thumbnail

HDD RAM

* Multiple editing is possible.

Chapter operations

HDD RAM

After performing steps 1–7 (➡ left) y Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles and

source chapters.

Add

(➡ 48, Creating playlists, steps 5–8)

Chapter Move Chapter

Create

Press [e, r, w, q] to select the position to insert the chapter and press [OK].

Playlists

HDD

001

RETURN

Move Chapter

01 12.10. SUN 0:11

002

0:10.240:10.24

0:19.36

--- ---

--- ------ ---

01/01

(➡ 47, Create Chapter)

Chapter Combine

(➡ 47, Combine Chapters)

Chapters Delete Chapter*

* Multiple editing is possible.

(➡ 47, Delete Chapter) The playlist itself is deleted if you delete all the chapters in it.

Creating, editing and playing playlists

y You can go back to Playlist View.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

RQT9090

Editing still pictures and music

RQT9090

Editing still pictures (JPEG)

HDD RAM SD

y You can edit pictures and albums. y You cannot edit still pictures recorded on DVD-R, DVD-R DL,

CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.

Preparation

y Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.

RAM SD

Release protection (➡ 68, Setting the protection).

1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

HDD RAM

“Green” button to select “PICTURE”.

When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the

2 Editing an album:

Select the album to be edited and press [OPTION].

y When you want to create an album using “Create Album”,

press [OPTION] without selecting album.

Editing a still picture:

1 Select the album which contains the still

picture to edit and press [OK].

2 Select the still pictures to edit and press

[OPTION].

To show other pages

Press [e, r, w, q] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK]. y You can also press [u, i] to show other pages.

Multiple editing

Select with [e, r, w, q] and press [h]. (Repeat.) A check mark appears. Press [h] again to cancel.

3 Press [

and press [OK].

■ To edit the album

■ To edit still picture

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

HDD

(e.g.,

Start Slide Show

Slide Show Setting

Add Pictures

Create Album

Edit Album

Copy to DVD-RAM

VIDEO/MUSIC

HDD

(e.g.,

Delete Picture

Properties

Change Date

Set up Protection

Cancel Protection

Album View

] to select the operation

e, r

)

Useful functions during still picture play (➡ 39)

Delete Album

Change Date

Set up Protection

Cancel Protection

Album (still picture) and picture operation (➡ right)

)

Album (still picture) and picture operation (➡ right)

You can go back to Album View.

Album (still picture) and picture operation

After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)

Delete Picture* Delete Album*

HDD RAM SD

Change Date*

HDD RAM

Enter Album Name

HDD RAM SD

Set up Protection* Cancel Protection*

HDD RAM SD

Properties

HDD RAM -R

-R DL

CD USB

Copy to DVD-RAM

HDD

Press [w, q] to select “Delete” and press [OK].

y Once deleted, the recorded contents are

lost and cannot be restored. Make certain

before proceeding.

y When deleting an album, ﬁ les other than

the still picture ﬁ les inside the album will also be deleted. (This does not apply to folders under the album concerned.)

You can change the date of the picture.

1 Press [w, q] to select the item

and press [e, r] to change.

2 Press [OK].

You can give names to albums. (➡ 52, Entering text) y Album names input using this unit may not

be displayed on other equipment.

If set, this will protect the still picture or album from accidental deletion.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR

HDD

Album Name

0001

103__

0002

Press [w, q] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

The lock symbol appears when the still picture or album is protected. y Even if the protection setting is used by this

unit to protect an album, the album may be deleted by another unit.

Information (e.g., image size and ﬁ le size) is shown. y To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].

Press [w, q] to select “Start” and press [OK].

You cannot copy if multiple albums are selected.

Copy to HDD

RAM

Add Pictures Create Album

HDD RAM SD

* Multiple editing is possible.

[Change Date : Only when the “Picture (JPEG) View” screen is displayed]

Note

y Timer recordings do not start when performing “Change Date”,

“Copy to DVD-RAM”, “Copy to HDD”, “Add Pictures” or “Create Album”.

1 Press [w, q] to select “Start” or

“Yes” and press [OK].

2 Press [e, r, w, q] to select the

album that contains the still picture you want to add and press [OK].

3 Press [e, r] to select the item

and press [OK].

y If “Select pictures to copy” is selected:

Select the still picture you want to add and press [OK].

y If “Copy all pictures” is selected:

All the still pictures in the album will be copied.

4 Press [w, q] to select “Yes” or

“No” and press [OK].

y If you want to continue copying, select

“Yes” and go to step 2.

Only for “Create Album”

5 Press [w, q] to select “Yes” or

“No” and press [OK].

y If “Yes” is selected:

You can give names to albums. (➡ 52, Entering text)

y If “No” is selected:

The album name is automatically given.

Editing music

HDD

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.

1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to select “MUSIC”.

2 Press [

] to select “Play CD on

e, r

HDD” or “Play MP3 on HDD” and press [OK].

3 Editing an album/group

Press [e, r] to select the album/ group and press [OPTION].

Editing a track

1 Press [e, r] to select the album/group and

press [OK].

2 Press [e, r] to select the track and press

[OPTION].

4 Press [

and press [OK].

■ To edit the album (CD)/group (MP3)

e.g., Album View (CD)

Delete Album

Enter Album Name

Repeat Play Setting

Track View

Sort

VIDEO/PICTURE

➡ below

■ To edit the track (CD/MP3)

e.g., Track View (MP3)

Delete Track

Properties

Enter Track Name

Enter Artist Name

Repeat Play Setting

Group View

Useful functions during music play (➡ 42)

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Album (CD)/group (MP3) and track (CD/MP3) operation

After performing steps 1-4 (➡ above)

Delete Album (CD) Delete Group (MP3) Delete Track (MP3)

Enter Album Name (CD) Enter Group Name (MP3) Enter Track Name (CD/ MP3)

Enter Artist Name (CD/ MP3)

Note

y Timer recordings do not start while editing music.

] to select the operation

e, r

Album (CD)/group (MP3) and track (CD/ MP3) operation (➡ below)

Useful functions during music play (➡ 42)

y Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to

play—Direct Navigator (➡ 35)

y Playing still pictures (➡ 38)

Album (CD)/group (MP3) and track (CD/ MP3) operation (➡ below)

You can go back to Album View (CD)/ Group View (MP3).

Press [w, q] to select “Delete” and press [OK]. y Once deleted, the recorded

contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before

proceeding.

You can give names to albums/groups and tracks. (➡ 52, Entering text)

You can edit the artist name of the track. (➡ 52, Entering text)

Deleting still pictures and music using DELETE Navigator

HDD RAM SD

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [

] to select “Delete” and

e, r

press [OK].

HDD RAM

Press the colour button to select “PICTURE” or “MUSIC”.

HDD

If you pressed the “Yellow” button, press [e, r] to select “Delete CD on HDD” or “Delete MP3 on HDD” and press [OK].

4 Deleting an album (still picture), album (CD) or group

(MP3)

Press [e, r, w, q] to select the item and press [DELETE ¼].

Deleting a still picture or track (MP3)

1 Press [e, r, w, q] to select the album or

group which contains the still picture or track to delete and press [OK].

2 Press [e, r, w, q] to select the still picture

or track and press [OK].

You can conﬁ rm the item that you have selected using the option menu. y Refer to option menu operations for the “Album View” (➡ 50,

step 3).

y Refer to option menu operations for the “Picture (JPEG)

View” (➡ 50, step 3).

y Refer to option menu operations for the “Album View (CD)”

(➡ left, step 4).

y Refer to option menu operations for the “Track View (MP3)”

(➡ left, step 4).

To show other pages [Album (still picture) and still picture only]

Press [u, i] to show other pages.

Multiple deleting [Album (still picture) and still picture only]

Select with [e, r, w, q] and press [h]. (Repeat.) A check mark appears. Press [h] again to cancel.

5 Press [

press [OK].

The item is deleted.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Note

You cannot delete a track (CD) individually.

] to select “Delete” and

w, q

Editing still pictures and music

RQT9090

Entering text

JKL

12345 ABC a DEF d

67890 bc ef/ %

1 2 3

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW SD

You can give names to recorded titles, etc. The maximum number of characters:

HDD RAM

Characters Title 64 (44*) Playlist 64 Album of still pictures 36 Album (CD) ( Group (MP3) ( Track (CD/MP3) ( Artist (CD/MP3) ( Disc (

HDD

)40

HDD

)40

HDD

)40

HDD

)40

RAM

)64

* Title name for timer recording

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

Characters Title 44 Disc 40

Characters Album of still pictures 36

Broadcast Characters Proﬁ le 1–4 14

Note

If a name is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens.

1 Show Enter Name screen.

Title (timer recording)

Select “Programme Name” in step 3 on page 30, right column.

Title

Select “Enter Name” in step 4 on page 46.

Playlist

Select “Enter Name” in step 5 on page 49.

Disc

Select “Disc Name” in step 1 of “Providing a name for a disc” on page 68.

HDD

)

HDD

)

Album (CD) (

Select “Enter Album Name” in step 4 of “Editing music” on page 51.

Group (MP3) (

Select “Enter Group Name” in step 4 of “Editing music” on page 51.

Track (CD/MP3) (

Select “Enter Track Name” in step 4 of “Editing music” on page 51.

Artist (CD/MP3) (

Select “Enter Artist Name” in step 4 of “Editing music” on page 51.

Album of still pictures

Select “Enter Album Name” in step 3 of “Editing still pictures (JPEG)” on page 50.

Proﬁ le 1–4

Press the “Red” button in step 2 of the right column on page 71, “To change the name of a proﬁ le in the “Proﬁ le” column”.

Name ﬁ eld: shows the text you have entered

RETURN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

Standard Characters Other Characters

12345 ABC a DEF d GH INOg JKL j M PQRSp TUV t WXY Z w

67890 bc ef/ % hi $ kl @

n qrs( ) uv{ } xyz

Space

;

e, r, w, q

Press the “Red” button or “Green” button to select character type and press

[OK].

“Standard Characters”:

]

(➡ left, Alphabet characters, etc.)

“Other Characters”:

(➡ below, Umlaut characters, accented characters, etc.)

¢¡£¤¥

«¬

µ¶·

¿Á

ÉÊË

ÔÕÖ

ÝÞßÐ áà

çèé

стуфх

þý

] to select a

¦§¨©ª ¯°± ² ¹º»¼½ ГДЕЖ НОПАС

ØÙ

вгдеж

ëìí î

ö÷ø ú

Space

È Ò

ï ù

Enter Name

Chapter 1

Top Menu Preview

Delete Set

SELECT

2 Press [

character and press [OK].

Repeat this step to enter other characters.

y To delete a character

Press [e, r, w, q] to select the character in the name ﬁ eld and press [h]. (The selected characters are deleted.)

y Using the numbered buttons to enter characters

e.g., entering the letter “R”

1 Press [7] to move to the 7th row. 2 Press [7] twice to highlight “R”. 3 Press [OK].

y To enter a space

Press [DELETE ¼] and press

[OK].

3 Press [

] (Set).

“Writing...” appears then the screen returns to the Title View screen and so on.

To end partway

Press [RETURN]. Text is not added.

For your reference

If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the Top Menu after ﬁ nalisation (➡ 70). When entering a title name, the name that will appear in the Top Menu can be previewed in “Top Menu Preview” window.

Enter Name

Chapter 1

Top Menu Preview

Chapter 1

Standard Characters Other Characters

PQR

TUV

RQT9090

Copying titles or playlists

Copy One Touch Copy Advanced Copy

Features

Copy direction

HDD l DVD {{{

DVD l HDD

HDD l VHS

DVD l VHS

VHS l HDD

VHS l DVD

High speed mode copy* (➡ 54, Before copying)

Easy copying from HDD to DVD with no difﬁ cult settings.

—

{

You can copy directly between HDD, DVD and VHS.

{

RAM -RW(VR) +RW

{{ {

RAM -R -R DL -RW(V)

-RW(VR)

+R +R DL +RW

{{ {

RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW

{

+RW

: You cannot perform

high-speed copy from +RW to HDD.

VHS

: You cannot perform

high-speed copy.

Changing recording mode

Finalise*

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL

Automatically ﬁ nalised

High speed

mode

Copying SD Video from an SD card

Copying playlists*

————

——

Are chapters maintained?

Are thumbnails maintained?

Recording and Playing while Copying

To high speed copy titles (or playlists created from those titles), set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD (The

——

—

-R -RW(V) +R

Normal speed

mode

High speed

mode

{{{{

{ {

—*

{

Can be selected

Normal speed

mode

—*

—

default setting is “On”. ➡ 73). However in the following cases, copying to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using the high speed mode does not work. y When arranging multiple titles for copying, if any titles are recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “Off”, then you cannot perform with

high-speed copy.

y Playlists created from titles using a variety of recording modes or multiple titles using FR recording mode. y Playlists mixed with a variety of audio types (Dolby Digital and LPCM, etc.). y Titles that contain many deleted segments. y SD Video titles copied to the HDD from an SD card.

+R +R DL +RW

-R -R DL -RW(V)

Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode. (Displayed ) Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect

Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode

*2 If you select a recording mode with better picture quality than the original, the picture quality does not improve. (However it does prevent

against degradation of picture quality.)

+R DL

You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode.

*3 You cannot select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select”.

If you want to set auto-play select or the background colour, select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select” in “DVD Management” before copying (➡ 70).

*4 You cannot copy playlists with a play time more than 8 hours.

When you copy a playlist, it will become a title in the destination drive.

RAM -R DL +R DL +RW

-R -RW(V) +R

: Chapters are created automatically (

: One title becomes one chapter.

-R -RW(V)

about 5-minutes

about 8-minutes) when ﬁ nalising after copying the disc. *6 Thumbnails return to the default position. *7 When copying playlists, the thumbnails may not reﬂ ect changes made to them. *8 Possible only with titles on the HDD

[However it is not possible when copying with automatic ﬁ nalisation or when copying SD Video from an SD card.] – You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying. – You cannot play a playlist while copying titles with “One time only recording” restriction (➡ 23). – Still pictures or music cannot be played.

Make a copying list and then copy. You can set the unit to copy titles or playlists in the way you want.

RAM -RW(VR) +RW DVD-V

(Only from a ﬁ nalised disc)

RAM -RW(VR) +RW DVD-V

(Only from a ﬁ nalised disc)

RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW

DVD-V

: You cannot perform

high-speed copy with ﬁ nalised discs.

+RW

: You cannot perform

high-speed copy from +RW to HDD.

VHS

: You cannot perform

high-speed copy.

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL

Can be selected

High speed

mode

{

HDD RAM

only

{

Normal speed

mode

—

—*

—

Entering text/Copying titles or playlists

RQT9090

Copying titles or playlists

■ Approximate copying times (Max. speed)

(excludes time required to write data management information)

HDD

Recording

Mode

Recorded

5X Speed

DVD-RAM

Required

time

12 min. 5x

Speed

SP 6 min. 10x

1 hour

LP 3 min. 20x EP (6H) 2 min. 30x 58 s. 62x EP (8H)

1 min. 30 s.

y The above values indicate the quickest possible times and speeds to high speed copy a one hour title recorded on the HDD to a high speed

recording compatible disc. Depending on what part of the disc is being written to, the features of the disc, etc., the times and speeds will vary. *1 In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed DVD-R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 12X Speed DVD-R disc. *2 In this unit, copying with 8X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL, will be performed at the same speed as with 4X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and

+R DL. *3 In this unit, copying with a 6X Speed DVD-RW disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 4X Speed DVD-RW disc. *4 In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed +R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 8X Speed +R disc.

Note

y When recording or playing while copying, the unit may not use the maximum recording speed. y Depending on the condition of the disc, the unit may not copy using the maximum speed.

Regarding copying to DVD-R DL (single-sided, Dual Layer) and +R DL (single-sided, Double Layer)

When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily copied at normal speed to the HDD and then copied at high speed to DVD-R DL and +R DL. The titles that were temporarily copied to the HDD are then deleted. You cannot copy to DVD-R DL and +R DL in the following cases.

– When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When

copying to a new blank disc, if you intend to ﬁ ll a new disc when copying to it, the equivalent of up to 4 hours of free space in SP mode is needed on the HDD.)

– When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the

number of titles to be copied to the DVD-R DL and +R DL is

greater than 499 in total. When playing a title recorded on both layers, video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers (➡ 13).

12X Speed

Required

time

5 min. 46 s. 2 min. 30 s. 1 min. 21 s.

DVD-R*

Speed

10x 15 min. 4x 15 min. 4x 24x 44x

40x 48 s. 75x

4X Speed

DVD-R DL*

Required

time

7 min. 30 s. 3 min. 45 s. 2 min. 30 s. 1 min. 53 s.

Speed

8x 16x 24x 32x

4X Speed

DVD-RW*

Required

time

7 min. 30 s. 3 min. 45 s. 2 min. 30 s. 1 min. 57 s.

Speed

16x 24x 31x

8X Speed

+R*

Required

time

8 min. 20 s. 3 min. 45 s. 1 min. 53 s.

Speed

4X Speed

+R DL*

Required

time

Speed

4X Speed

+RW

Required

time

7x 15 min. 4x 15 min. 4x 16x 32x

7 min. 30 s. 3 min. 45 s.

16x

7 min. 30 s. 3 min. 45 s.

Regarding copying of the broadcasts that allow “One time only recording”

You can copy a recorded title to a CPRM (➡ 96) compatible DVD-RAM, however, the title is deleted from the HDD.

y Titles or playlists cannot be copied from DVD-RAM to the HDD. y Titles will not be copied if they are protected (➡ 47). y You cannot copy playlists created from “One time only recording”

titles.

y Titles with recording limitations and playlists cannot be

registered on the same copying list.

Regarding copying from VHS

y It is not possible to copy a copied “One time only recording” title. y If you want to copy to the HDD and then to

+R DL +RW

in high speed mode, set “Rec for High Speed Copy”

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R

to “On” before recording to the HDD (➡ 73).

y If a part of a tape recorded in AUTO mode is copied to the HDD

or a disc, noise may appear on that part.

Regarding copying to VHS

y When copying “One time only recording” titles to VHS, the copy

guard signal is also copied. – Even when copying to tape the title may not be copied correctly

because of the copy guard. When copying it to HDD or a disc again, the area where the copy guard signal was recorded is not copied.

Speed

16x

RQT9090

Before copying

When copying a title with main and secondary audio

y Select the audio type for recording bilingual broadcast from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ 74) when:

– Copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW. – When “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM” (➡ 74) and you are copying in XP mode.

■ Speed and recording mode when copying

HDD

RAM

RAM -RW(VR) +RW

HDD

Rec for High Speed Copy (➡ 73)

Only titles recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “On”. *

Only titles recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “Off ”.

When making a copy of multiple titles that were recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “On” and “Off”.

HDD

RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

Normal speed only (select recording mode in VHS drive before copying)

Note

Titles and playlists recorded using a different encoding system (PAL or NTSC) from the TV system currently selected on the unit cannot be copied.

: High speed

HDD

: Normal speed only

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

VHS

: Normal speed only

: High speed

: Refer to the following table.

Copy speed

High speed

Normal speed

VHS

* In the following cases, even if “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to

“On”, copy will perform at normal speed.

+R +R DL +RW

When the copying source was recorded in “EP”

or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode.

y When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space. y When the title aspect for the copying source and “Aspect for

Recording” do not match.

y When the title aspect for the copying source is 16:9:

+R +R DL +RW

–

-R -R DL -RW(V)

–

copying source was recorded in “EP” or “FR”

(recordings 5 hours or longer) mode.

Copy

Preparation

y Insert a disc that you can use for copying (➡ 17). y Conﬁ rm that there is enough remaining disc space.

DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL are automatically ﬁ nalised (➡ 96). After ﬁ nalising, the discs become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.

HDD

RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

p (You cannot copy to ﬁ nalised discs.) When copying in normal speed, recording mode will be set to FR. (However, if there is still not enough space after setting to FR mode, copy will not be performed.)

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [

] to select “Copy” and

e, r

press [OK].

COPY Navigator

HDD

No. Date Day TimeName Name of title

001 002 003 004

Rec time

005

0:52(SP)

006 007 008

---

OPTION

RETURN

3 Press [

All Titles Disc Space:

ARD 26. 9. 13:30 ZDF 27. 9. 12:15 AV2 3. 10. 20:00 ARD 3. 10. 22:05 AV2 4. 10. 16:10 ZDF 10.10. 9:25 ARD 10.10. 13:30 ARD 11.10. 21:00

Page

Select

e, r

4310MB

0MB( 0%)

Total Size:Total :

FRI SAT FRI FRI SAT FRI FRI SAT

01/01

] to select the title you

want to copy and press [h].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items. y Press [h] again to cancel.

To show other pages

Press [u, i] to show other pages.

4 Press [OK]. 5 After you start copying to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW

(DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL discs, they become play-only and you can no longer record or edit.

Press [w, q] to select “Start” and press [OK].

Copy starts.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

■ To stop copying (➡ 58)

■ COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions (➡ 59)

■ To check the properties of a title and sort COPY

Navigator

1 Press [e, r] to select the title and press

[OPTION].

COPY Navigator

HDD

Rec time

0:52(SP)

RETURN

All Titles Disc Space:

No. Date Day TimeName Name of title

001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008

---

Properties

Sort

Grouped Titles

OPTION

Total Size:Total :

FRI

ARD 26. 9. 13:30

SAT

ZDF 27. 9. 12:15

FRI

AV2 3. 10. 20:00

FRI

ARD 3. 10. 22:05

SAT

AV2 4. 10. 16:10

FRI

ZDF 10.10. 9:25

FRI

ARD 10.10. 13:30

SAT

ARD 11.10. 21:00

Page

01/01

4310MB

0MB( 0%)

2 Press [e, r] to select “Properties” or “Sort” and

press [OK].

Properties:

The name, recording date, channel etc. of the selected title are shown.

Sort (All Titles screen only): Press [e, r] to select the item and press [OK].

This changes the way that titles are displayed. You can select to display titles by No., recording date, day, channel, recording start time and title name. (You cannot select a title if it has a check mark.) If you close the COPY Navigator screen, the display order is cancelled.

Note

y When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed recording

compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or +RW 4X, the sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal. If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal (Silent)” in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (➡ 73).

y If you register multiple titles, they are copied in order from the title

at the top of the screen and not in the order you registered them. To change the order that titles are copied, create a copying list and then copy the contents of the list (➡ 58).

Copying titles or playlists/Copy

RQT9090

One Touch Copy

[w HDD]

HDD  VHS

[HDD q]

HDD  DVD

HDD p DVD or VHS

HDD

RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW VHS

p The title or playlist being played will automatically be copied. Copying will start from the beginning of the title or playlist being played, regardless of the current position.

Preparation Copy to:

y DVD: insert a disc that you can use for copying (➡ 17). y VHS: insert a video cassette with an accidental erasure prevention

tab (➡ 17).

y Conﬁ rm that there is enough remaining disc or tape space. y Select the recording mode.

COPYING indicator

1 Play the desired title or playlist to

copy (➡ 35, 49).

y You can also copy even after pressing [h] to pause

playback.

2 Press and hold [

on the main unit for about 3 seconds or more (until “START” on the unit’s display terminates ﬂ ashing).

y The “COPYING” indicator on the main unit lights. y Check if copy starts properly.

Current copy status (38% has been copied)*

* Remaining copy time appears when copying by normal

speed.

When the ﬁ nalize conﬁ rmation screen appears

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL

Do you want to ﬁ nalize the disc after copying completes ? Finalizing is to allow the disc to be played on other DVD players. The disc becomes play-only.

Press REC to start ﬁ nalizing after copying completes.

Press PLAY to start copying only.

Press STOP to cancel copying.

HDD] or [HDD q]

Copy

VHS p HDD or DVD

VHS

HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW

p Copying automatically starts from the current position on the video cassette.

Preparation Copy to:

y DVD: insert a disc that you can use for copying (➡ 17). y Conﬁ rm that there is enough remaining HDD or disc space. y Select the recording mode.

Copy from:

y VHS: insert the video cassette containing the programme to be

copied (➡ 17).

[w VHS]

VHS  HDD

[VHS q]

VHS  DVD

COPYING indicator

While both VHS and HDD or DVD are stopped

Press and hold [w VHS] or [VHS q] on the main unit for about 3 seconds or more (until “START” on the unit’s display terminates ﬂ ashing).

y The “COPYING” indicator on the main unit lights. y Check if copy starts properly.

When the ﬁ nalize conﬁ rmation screen appears (➡ left)

When copy without ﬁ nalize

When copying starts, the selected drive automatically changes to HDD. Therefore, the current state of the HDD drive appears on the unit’s display. (When the HDD is stopped, the display on the right appears. The elapsed DVD recording time is not displayed.)

RQT9090

y If you press [* REC] on the main unit, the disc will automatically

be ﬁ nalized after copying completes. – After ﬁ nalizing, the discs become play-only and you can also

play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.

y If you press [q] (PLAY) on the main unit, you can start copying

without ﬁ nalizing.

y If you press [g] on the main unit, you can cancel to copy.

Note

y You cannot copy playlists with a play time more than 8 hours. y When you copy a playlist, it will become a title in the destination

drive.

DVD p HDD

[w DVD]

DVD  VHS

RAM -RW(VR) +RW

All the titles or playlists recorded on a disc are copied automatically to the HDD.

Preparation

Copy to:

y Conﬁ rm that there is enough remaining HDD space. y Select the recording mode.

Copy from:

y DVD: insert the disc containing the programme to be copied

(➡ 17).

HDD

COPYING indicator

[DVD q]

DVD  HDD

DVD p VHS

RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) -RW(VR) +R +R DL +RW

All the titles recorded on the disc, the beginning of the selected title to the end of the disc or the beginning of the selected playlist to the last playlist is automatically copied to the video cassette.

Preparation Copy to:

y VHS: insert a video cassette with an accidental erasure prevention

tab (➡ 17).

y Conﬁ rm that there is enough remaining tape space. y Select the recording mode.

Copy from:

y DVD: insert the disc containing the programme to be copied

(➡ 17).

VHS

One Touch Copy

When you want to copy titles

Go to step 2 y All the titles recorded on a disc are copied automatically

during play or while stopped.

When you want to copy playlists

Play the desired playlist (➡ 49). y All the playlists recorded on a disc are copied

automatically regardless of the current position.

y You can copy while playback is paused by pressing [h].

2 Press and hold [DVD

] on the main

unit for about 3 seconds or more (until “START” on the unit’s display terminates ﬂ ashing).

y The “COPYING” indicator on the main unit lights. y Check if copy starts properly.

Current copy status (38% has been copied)*

* Remaining copy time appears when copying by normal

speed.

Note

y You cannot copy the playlist which is longer than 8 hours. (When

you copy multiple playlists, the playlist which is longer than 8 hours is omitted.)

y When you copy playlists, they will become titles in the HDD drive.

COPYING indicator

When you copy a whole disc

Make sure that the DVD is stopped. y Press [STATUS ] to check that the resume play function

is not active on the DVD drive. If the DVD counter appears on the unit’s display, press [g] to clear the resume play position (➡ 34).

y When the resume play function is active, the copy will start

from the memorized position to the end of the disc.

When you copy a title from the beginning of the selected title to the end of the disc

When you copy a playlist from the beginning of the selected playlist to the last playlist

Play the desired title (➡ 35) or playlist (➡ 49). y You can copy (a title or playlist) while playback is paused

by pressing [h].

y You cannot copy the playlist which is longer than 8 hours.

(When you copy multiple playlists, the playlist which is longer than 8 hours is omitted.)

2 Press and hold [

DVD] on the main

unit for about 3 seconds or more (until “START” on the unit’s display terminates ﬂ ashing).

y The “COPYING” indicator on the main unit lights. y Check if copy starts properly.

Recording mode of VHS

Note

y When copying is not started or not executed, the “COPYING”

indicator blinks for about 7 seconds. Check if the unit is properly prepared.

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL

ﬁ nalised disc.

To copy from a ﬁ nalised disc

(➡ 59, Copying a ﬁ nalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL)

VHS

SECAM recorded VHS tapes cannot be played on this unit.

To copy a SECAM recorded VHS tape (➡ 28)

You cannot copy the content of a

Recording and playing in HDD while copying

(Only when high-speed copying)

Press [OK] to cancel the screen display, and then operate play or record.

Remaining time on the tape (1 hour 48 minutes)

y To conﬁ rm the current progress

Press [STATUS

y During copy, you cannot chasing play, edit and etc.

To stop copying partway

When High-speed copying

Press and hold [RETURN] for about 3 seconds or more.

When Normal Speed copying

Press [g] or press and hold [RETURN] for about 3 seconds or more.

y However, you cannot stop ﬁ nalizing after it has started. y Even if “Copy and ﬁ nalize” is selected in the conﬁ rmation screen,

the disc will not be ﬁ nalised if you stop copying partway.

Copying speed mode and recording mode (➡ 54)

RQT9090

02/02

007

ARD 10.10. FRI

008 0:30(XP)

ARD 11.10. SAT

- - -

- - -- - -- - -

RETURN

OPTION

Advanced Copy

RQT9090

Copying using the copying list– Advanced Copy

HDD

RAM +RW

-RW(VR) HDD RAM SD

HDD

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL VHS

-RW(VR) +RW HDD RAM

VHS

You can order titles and playlists as desired for copy to disc or tape.

See also “Before copying” (➡ 54).

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [

] to select “To Others” and

e, r

press [OK].

3 Press [

] to select “Advanced

e, r

Copy” and press [OK].

Copy

Cancel All

1 Copy Direction

HDD t DVD

2 Copy Mode

VIDEO High Speed

Start Copying

RETURN

3 Create List

y If you are not going to change the registered list, press [r]

several times (➡ step 7).

HDD

Source

Destination

DVD

Select the copy direction.

4 Set the copy direction.

y If you are not going to change the copying direction, press

[r] (➡ step 5).

1 Press [e, r] to select “Copy Direction” and press [q]. 2 Press [e, r] to select “Source” and press [OK]. 3 Press [e, r] to select the drive and press [OK]. 4 Press [e, r] to select “Destination” and press [OK]. 5 Press [e, r] to select the drive and press [OK].

The same drive as the copy source cannot be selected.

6 Press [w] to conﬁ rm.

5 Set the recording mode.

y If you are not going to change the recording mode, press

[r] (➡ step 6).

1 Press [e, r] to select “Copy Mode” and press [q]. 2 Press [e, r] to select “Format” and press [OK]. 3 Press [e, r] to select “VIDEO” and press [OK]. 4 Press [e, r] to select “Recording Mode” and press [OK]. 5 Press [e, r] to select the mode and press [OK]. 6 Press [w] to conﬁ rm.

6 Register titles and playlists for copy.

y If you are going to copy a registered list without making any

changes to it (➡ step 7).

1 Press [e, r] to select “Create List” and press [q].

Copy

OPTION

All Titles

Page

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

New item (Total = 0)

Create copy list.

Select

SizeNo.

Page

Size:

Name of item

01/01

VIDEO

0MB

Playlists

( 0%)

Cancel All

1 Copy Direction

HDD t DVD

2 Copy Mode

VIDEO High Speed

3 Create List

Start Copying

RETURN

2 Press [e, r] to select “New item” and press [OK]. 3 Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO” or press the

“Green” button to select “Playlists”.

Create List

HDD

4 Press [e, r, w, q] to select the title or playlist and press

[h]. A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.

y Press [h] again to cancel. y The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If

you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.

y When you switch between the “VIDEO” and “Playlists”

tab, the check mark is cancelled.

y When copying to a disc using high speed mode,

-R -R DL -RW(V)

: only items indicated with “ ” or

“ ” can be registered.

+R +R DL +RW

: only items indicated with “ ” can be

registered.

y To show other pages (➡ below)

5 Press [OK].

y To edit the copying list (➡ 59)

You cannot start copying when the value of the “Size” (➡ 59) exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity” is not sufﬁ cient).

6 Press [w] to conﬁ rm.

7 Press [

] to select “Start Copying”

e, r

and press [OK].

When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed recording compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or +RW 4X, the sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal. If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal (Silent)” in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (➡ 73).

8 Press [

] to select “Yes” and press

w, q

[OK] to start copying.

HDD

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL

Press [w, q] to select “Copy & Finalise” or “Copy Only” and press [OK].

y If “Copy & Finalise” is selected

After ﬁ nalising, the discs become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.

To show other pages

Press [e, r, w, q] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK]. y You can also press [u, i] to show other pages.

■ To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds. (You cannot stop while ﬁ nalising.)

When High-speed copying

All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are copied.

When Normal Speed copying

Copies until the point cancelled. However titles with “One time only recording” restriction, only titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are copied to the disc. Titles that are cancelled before the copy is complete are not copied and remain on the HDD.

-R DL +R DL

temporarily copying to the HDD, then nothing will be copied. However, if copy is cancelled during the step while copying to disc from the HDD, then only titles completely copied at the point cancelled are copied.

Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW, the amount of remaining writable disc space becomes less.

■ To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

■ Recording and playing while copying

You can record and play using the HDD while high speed copying. (Only when high speed copying without ﬁ nalising) y Still pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be played.

Press [OK] to cancel the screen display.

y To conﬁ rm the current progress

Press [STATUS ].

Note

y Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded to the

HDD regardless of the recording drive settings. (Only when high speed copying without ﬁ nalising)

If copy is cancelled during the step while

COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions

RETURN

COPY Navigator/Copying list indicators

Titles and playlists that can be copied in high speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW

Titles and playlists that can be copied in high speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) (However, titles and playlists cannot be copied in high speed mode to +R, +R DL, +RW)

+R DL

is displayed, but copy cannot be

performed. Title with “One time only recording” restriction

(➡ 23, When recording the “One time only recording” broadcasts)

Titles deleted from the HDD by “One time only recording” restriction after copying. (➡ 23, When recording the “One time only recording” broadcasts)

Title or playlist contains still picture(s) y Still picture(s) cannot be copied.

(NTSC) (PAL)

Data size of each registered item

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

No. Size Name of item

New item (Total=0)

Create copy list.

To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL on other players, it is necessary to ﬁ nalise them after copy.

■ To edit the copying list

Select the item after step 6–5 (➡ 58) 1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [e, r] to select the operation and press

[OK].

Delete All:

Delete all items registered on the copying list. Press [w, q] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

Add:

Add new items to the copying list. 1 Press [e, r, w, q] to select the title or playlist and press [h].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items. y Press [h] again to cancel.

2 Press [OK].

Delete:

Delete the selected items. Press [w, q] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

Move:

Move selected items or change the order of items on the copying list. Press [e, r] to select the destination and press [OK].

To cancel all registered copying setting and lists

After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 58)

1 Press [e, r] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK]. 2 Press [w, q] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

y The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.

– When a title, still picture, etc. has been recorded or deleted at

the copy source

– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,

open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.

Title or playlist recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV system currently selected on the unit. y Titles and playlists displaying these marks

cannot be selected.

(0%)

0MB

Size

Size:

Data size recorded to the copy destination y When copying at normal speed, the

total data size will change according to

Page

01/01

the recording mode.

y The total data size shown may be

larger than the sum of the data sizes for each registered item, because of data management information being written to the copy destination, etc.

Delete All

Add

Delete

Move

Copying a ﬁ nalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL

DVD-V

You can copy the content of ﬁ nalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD or VHS and re-edit the content copied to the HDD. While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the HDD or VHS according to the set time.

y When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (➡ 73) is set to “On” and you

y Operations and on screen displays during copy are also

y Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent

y The following cannot be copied: Video CD, Audio CD and so on.

Preparation

y Insert the ﬁ nalised disc (➡ 17).

After performing steps 1–5 (“Format” is automatically set to “DVDVideo”) (➡ 58, Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy)

HDD VHS

HDD

If you perform search, frame-by-frame or pause while

copying, that portion of title is not recorded.

make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected in “Aspect for Recording” (➡ 73) of the Setup menu.

recorded.

illegal copying, and cannot be copied.

1 Set “Copy Time”.

y If you are not going to change the setting (➡ step 2).

Setting the unit to copy according to the set time

1 Press [e, r] to select “Copy Time” and press [q]. 2 Press [e, r] to select “Time Setting” and press [OK].

y Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc

3 Press [e, r] to select “Off” and press [OK]. 4 Press [w] to conﬁ rm.

Copy will continue until there is not enough available recording space on the HDD or VHS.

y Setting the copying time

3 Press [e, r] to select “On” and press [OK]. 4 Press [e, r] to select “Copy Time” and press [OK].

Copy

Cancel All

1 Copy Direction

DVD t HDD

2 Copy Mode

DVD-Video XP

3 Copy Time

Start Copying

Set the time a few minutes longer.

Press OK to change the setting.

5 Press [w, q] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press [e, r]

to set the recording time.

6 Press [OK]. 7 Press [w] to conﬁ rm.

Copying to the HDD or VHS continues for the set time even after the content being played ﬁ nishes.

y Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to

include the operation time before play begins.

y You can also set the recording time with the numbered

buttons.

2 Press [

e, r

and press [OK].

Press [w, q] to select “Yes” and press [OK] to start copying. The disc top menu is displayed. y Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is

selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when ﬁ nalising the disc (➡ 70).

Min.

Hour

] to select “Start Copying”

(Continued on the next page)

Advanced Copy

RQT9090

01/02

Advanced Copy

RQT9090

3 When the top menu is displayed

Press [e, r, w, q] to select the title you want to start copying, and press [OK].

My favorite

Chapter 1

Chapter 3

Chapter 2

Chapter 4

While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has ﬁ nished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is reached.)

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To stop copying

Press [g]. You can also press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds to stop copying. y If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.

Note

y The screen on the right is recorded at the

beginning.

y The content is recorded as 1 title from the start

of copy to the end.

y If play does not begin automatically or if the top

menu does not display automatically, press [q] (PLAY) to start.

y Even if you copy a high quality video/audio DVD, the original

picture and audio quality cannot be exactly replicated.

y If you want to copy a title from a ﬁ nalised DVD-RW (DVD Video

Recording format), create a copying list and then copy (➡ 58, Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy).

Copying a video cassette

VHS

HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW

Preparation:

Insert a disc and video cassette that you can use for copying (➡ 17).

y Conﬁ rm that there is enough remaining disc space. y

When copying an NTSC tape to a DVD, change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 75). This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)

After performing steps 1−5 (“Format” is automatically set to “VHSVideo”) (➡ 58, Copying using the copying list−Advanced Copy)

1 Set “Copy Time”.

y If you are not going to change the setting (➡ step 2).

Setting the unit to copy according to the set time

1 Press [e, r] to select “Copy Time”, then press [q]. 2 Press [e, r] to select “Time Setting”, then press [OK].

y Setting the unit to copy all the content on the video cassette

3 Press [e, r] to select “Off”, then press [OK]. 4 Press [w] to conﬁ rm.

y Setting the copying time

3 Press [e, r] to select “On”, then press [OK]. 4 Press [e, r] to select “Copy Time”, then press [OK].

Copy

Cancel All

1 Copy Direction

VHS t DVD

2 Copy Mode

VHS-Video SP

3 Copy Time

Set the time a few minutes longer.

5 Press [w, q] to select “Hour” and “Min.”, then press

[e, r] to set the recording time.

6 Press [OK]. 7 Press [w] to conﬁ rm.

You can also set the recording time with the numbered buttons.

y You cannot set a recording period longer than 25 hours.

VHS

-R -RW(V) +R

Press [w, q] to select “Copy & Finalise” or “Copy Only”, then press [OK].

y If “Copy & Finalise” is selected

After ﬁ nalising, the discs become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.

Hour

Min.

2 Press [

] to select “Start Copying”,

e, r

then press [OK].

3 Press [

] to select “Yes”, then press

[OK] to start copying.

y Copying continues until the set time even if the playback of

the programme you wish to copy ﬁ nishes. Note that copying is automatically stopped when the tape reaches the end or the remaining capacity of the copy destination is ﬁ lled.

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds. (You cannot stop while ﬁ nalising.)

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

Note

y To play DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +R on other

players, it is necessary to ﬁ nalise them after copy.

About FR mode When “Time Setting” is set to “Off” in step 1 (➡ left):

y The recording mode is automatically selected by estimating the

remaining capacity of the disc for copying of only the recorded parts in the video cassette (unrecorded parts will not be recorded).

y When you press [OK] to start copy, the tape is automatically fast-

forwarded to the end and then fast-rewound to the beginning before the copying is actually started. It may take time to start copy. If the remaining capacity of the disc is insufﬁ cient, the copying will be stopped in the middle.

y The recording is divided into titles every time the tape index

signals are detected.

When “Time Setting” is set to “On” in step 1 (➡ left):

y The recording mode is automatically determined by estimating the

remaining capacity of the disc for copying of the contents equivalent to the recording time set from the start point of the copying on the video cassette (unrecorded parts will also be recorded).

y The recording is not divided into titles. y SECAM recorded VHS tapes cannot be played on this unit.

To copy a SECAM recorded VHS tape (➡ 28)

HDD

DVD-RAM

VIDEO

SD Video

Copying SD Video

Copying SD Video from an SD card

Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have been taken by a Panasonic SD Video Camera, digital video camera etc, can be stored on HDD or DVD-RAM. (All the recordings on the same date become a title.) y You cannot playback SD Video on an SD card with this unit. You

must copy the ﬁ les to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.

y You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video. y This unit cannot copy AVCHD format motion pictures from an SD

card.

* DVD Video Recording format

The display below automatically appears when you insert a card into the SD card slot while stopped. Press [e, r] to select “Copy Video (MPEG2)” and press [OK]. Then go to step 7 on page 58.

SD Card

Copy Video (MPEG2)

Play Pictures (JPEG)

Copy Pictures (JPEG)

SELECT

RETURN

How to copy

Refer to “Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy” (➡ 58). Please set the items in steps 4 and 5 as shown below.

Copy Direction:

Source: SD CARD

Copy Mode:

Format: VIDEO y SD Video on an SD card is automatically registered on the

copying list.

y If there is no SD Video on an SD card, “Copy Video (MPEG2)” is

not displayed.

Copying SD Video from a video equipment

Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have been taken by a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc, can be copied from the camera’s HDD to this unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM. (All the recordings on the same date become a title.) y You cannot playback SD Video in the camera’s HDD with this unit.

You must copy the ﬁ les to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.

y You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.

SD Video

* DVD Video Recording format

Preparation

1 Turn on both this unit and the camera. 2 Connect the camera to this unit. 3 Select the appropriate mode that makes the camera ready for

data transfer (such as “PC CONNECT”) on the camera.

y Refer to the camera’s operating instructions for detail.

The display below automatically appears when you connect the camera to this unit. Press [e, r] to select “Copy Video (MPEG2)” and press [OK]. Then go to step 7 on page 58.

USB device

Play Video (DivX) Copy Video (MPEG2) Play Pictures (JPEG)

Copy Pictures (JPEG)

Play Music (MP3)

Copy Music (MP3)

Update CD database on HDD

SELECT

RETURN

y SD Video on the camera is automatically registered on the

copying list.

y If there is no SD Video on the camera, “Copy Video (MPEG2)” is

not displayed.

HDD

DVD

VHS

VIDEO

HDD

DVD-RAM

Advanced Copy/Copying SD Video

RQT9090

Copying still pictures

HDD RAM USB SD

y SDHC Memory Cards used for recording with this unit can only be

used with other SDHC Memory Card-compatible equipment. SDHC Memory Cards cannot be used with equipment that is only compatible with SD Memory Cards.

y You cannot copy pictures recorded to DVD-R, DVD-R DL or CD-R/

CD-RW.

y Still pictures copied from USB memories or SD cards are grouped

by the shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.

Copying all the still pictures on the USB memory—Copy All Pictures

USB

HDD

RAM

1 While stopped

Insert the USB memory (➡ 17).

The menu is automatically displayed.

USB device

Play Video (DivX)

Play Pictures (JPEG)

Copy Pictures (JPEG)

Play Music (MP3)

Copy Music (MP3)

Update CD database on HDD

SELECT

RETURN

2 Press [

(JPEG)” and press [OK].

Copy All Pictures

Copy from

Copy to

3 Press [

press [w, q] to select the drive.

] to select “Copy Pictures

e, r

USB

HDD

] to select “Copy to” and

e, r

2 Press [

] to select “Copy Pictures

e, r

(JPEG)” and press [OK].

Copy New Pictures

Copy from

Copy to

3 Press [

SD CARD

HDD

] to select “Copy to” and

e, r

press [w, q] to select the drive.

4 Press [

e, r, w, q

] to select “Copy”

and press [OK].

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

Note

y This unit saves the information on up to 12,000 still pictures and

30 SD cards. If additional still pictures are imported, then the older information will be deleted.

y If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of

ﬁ les/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (➡ 16), copying will stop partway through.

y You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.

Copying using the copying list

HDD RAM SD

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [

press [OK].

] to select “To Others” and

e, r

4 Press [

e, r, w, q

] to select “Copy”

and press [OK].

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

Note

y The structure of folders on the USB memory may not be the same

at the copy destination.

y If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of

ﬁ les/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (➡ 16), copying will stop partway through.

y You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.

Copying new still pictures on the SD card—Copy New Pictures

HDD

RAM

p This unit saves information about imported still pictures. Therefore, if still pictures are imported from the same SD card, then only new still pictures will be imported.

1 While stopped

Insert the SD card (➡ 17).

The menu is automatically displayed.

SD Card

Play Pictures (JPEG)

Copy Pictures (JPEG)

SELECT

RETURN

3 Press [

] to select “Advanced

e, r

Copy” and press [OK].

The menu is automatically displayed.

Copy

Cancel All

1 Copy Direction

SD CARD t HDD

2 Copy Mode

PICTURE High Speed

3 Create List

y If you are not going to change the registered list, press [r]

several times (➡ step 7).

Source

Destination

SD CARD

HDD

4 Set the copy direction.

y If you are not going to change the copying direction, press

[r] (➡ step 5).

The same drive as the copy source can be selected.

6 Press [w] to conﬁ rm.

5 Set the copy mode.

y If you are not going to change the recording mode, press

[r] (➡ step 6).

1 Press [e, r] to select “Copy Mode” and press [q]. 2 Press [e, r] to select “Format” and press [OK]. 3 Press [e, r] to select “PICTURE” and press [OK].

“Recording Mode” is automatically set to “High Speed”.

4 Press [w] to conﬁ rm.

RQT9090

6 Register still pictures for copy.

001 100__DVD 002 101__DVD 003 102__DVD

---

y If you are going to copy a registered list without making any

changes to it (➡ step 7).

You can register still pictures or still picture folders. y Still pictures and folders cannot be registered on the same

list.

Copy

Cancel All

1 Copy Direction

SD CARD t HDD

2 Copy Mode

PICTURE High Speed

3 Create List

Start Copying

RETURN

■ To register individual still pictures

1 Press [e, r] to select “Create List” and press [q]. 2 Press [e, r] to select “New item” and press [OK]. 3 Press [e, r, w, q] to select the still picture and press [h].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.

y Press [h] again to cancel. y The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If

you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.

y To show other pages (➡ right) y To select another folder (➡ right)

4 Press [OK].

y To edit the copying list (➡ right)

5 Press [w] to conﬁ rm.

■ To register on a folder by folder basis

1 Press [e, r] to select “Create List” and press [q]. 2 Press [e, r] to select “Picture/Folder” and press [OK].

Copy

Cancel All

1 Copy Direction

SD CARD t HDD

3 Press [e, r] to select “Folder” and press [OK]. 4 Press [e, r] to select “New item” and press [OK]. 5 Press [e, r] to select the folder and press [h].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.

y Press [h] again to cancel. y The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If

you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.

y To show other pages (➡ right)

6 Press [OK].

y To edit the copying list (➡ right)

7 Press [w] to conﬁ rm.

7 Press [

and press [OK].

y Only when copying individual still pictures from

to When specifying another folder as the copying destination, select “Folder”.

8 Press [

[OK] to start copying.

OPTION

e, r

w, q

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

Picture

Picture/Folder

Name of item

SizeNo.

New item (Total = 0)

Page 01/01

Create copy list.

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

Picture

Picture/Folder

Name of item

SizeNo.

New item (Total = 0)

] to select “Start Copying”

New folderFolder

New folder

] to select “Yes” and press

HDD RAM

Note

y The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on the

copying list may not be the same at the copy destination.

y If still pictures are already contained inside the copy destination

folder, the new still pictures are recorded following the existing still pictures.

y If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of

ﬁ les/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (➡ 16), copying will stop partway through.

y You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.

To show other pages

Press [e, r, w, q] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK]. y You can also press [u, i] to show other pages.

■ To edit the copying list

Select the item after step 6-4 (for a still picture) or 6-6 (for a folder) (➡ left).

1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [e, r] to select the operation and press

Delete All

Add

Delete

[OK].

Delete All:

Delete all items registered on the copying list. Press [w, q] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

Add:

Add new items to the copying list. 1 Press [e, r, w, q] to select the still picture or folder and press

[h]. A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items. y Press [h] again to cancel.

2 Press [OK].

Delete:

Delete the selected items. Press [w, q] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

To cancel all registered copying settings and lists

After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 62, Copying using the copying list) 1 Press [e, r] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK]. 2 Press [w, q] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. y The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.

– When a title or still picture has been recorded or deleted at the

copy source

– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,

remove the card, open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.

Copying still pictures

■ To select another folder

After performing step 6-2 (➡ left, To register individual still pictures) 1 Press [e, r, w, q] to select “Folder” and press [OK]. 2 Press [e, r] to select the folder and press [OK].

Create List Picture (JPEG)

SD CARD

Folder

103__DVD

0002

0001

----

RETURN

0003

----

---- ---- ----

Page

001/001

0004

--------

You can also select folders with the numbered buttons. e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5] 15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5] 115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]

y The still pictures of different folders cannot be registered on the

same list.

Create List

SD CARD

RETURN

\DCIM\100__DVD 001 100__DVD 002 101__DVD 003 102__DVD 004 103__DVD

---

Folder

Page

01/01

Picture File

00120012

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

RQT9090

Copying music to HDD

You can store the two formats of music data in this unit’s HDD.

Music CD (CD-DA)

When copying music CDs, this unit makes access to the internal Gracenote

Database to obtain title information. The album name, track name and artist name are assigned automatically allowing you ﬁ nd the track easily when playing back.

MP3

You can copy MP3 ﬁ les from the USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW.

About the Gracenote® Database

The Gracenote® Database is a database used to search and retrieve CD title information. When a CD is inserted or copying from a CD begins, the unit will automatically search for and obtain information about the inserted CD. The Gracenote® Database comes pre-installed on this unit, so titles and artist information can be obtained. Please note however that the newest CD titles, etc. may not be registered yet to the internal database. This unit has an internal database containing information for approximately 350,000 album titles. You can update the internal database (➡ 65).

If there are CDs with very similar title information, then the incorrect title information may be obtained. If no title suggestions are found, then track name, album name and artist name will be blank. In these cases, enter the CD title information manually, after copying to the HDD has completed.

Copying music from a music CD

HDD

p All tracks on the music CD (CD-DA) are copied on the HDD. (Cannot copy track-by-track.)

y One CD is recorded on the HDD as one album. y Audio quality: LPCM y The maximum number of albums on HDD: 300

(Depends on the remaining capacity.) If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums that can be recorded will be reduced.

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

1 Insert a music CD.

The menu is automatically displayed.

Play Music

Copy Music

SELECT

RETURN

2 Press [

and press [OK].

The unit starts accessing the Gracenote® Database and searches for the title information.

If search results indicate that multiple titles were found

Press [e, r] to select the appropriate title and press [OK].

3 Press [

press [OK].

Copying starts.

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds. y If the copying is cancelled, then no tracks on the CD will be

copied.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

] to select “Copy Music”

e, r

] to select “Copy” and

w, q

Note

y While copying, no other operations can be performed. Timer

recordings will not proceed.

y Tracks copied on the HDD cannot be transferred to a disc, USB

memory or SD card.

y CDs which have SCMS (Serial Copy Management System)

restrictions cannot be copied to the HDD.

Copying music (MP3) from a USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW

USB CD

You can copy MP3 ﬁ les recorded on USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW to the HDD by ﬁ le or folder.

y One folder is recorded on the HDD as one group. y The maximum number of groups on HDD: 300

The maximum number of tracks on HDD: 3000 (Depends on the remaining capacity.) If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of groups that can be recorded will be reduced.

HDD

1 While stopped

Insert the USB memory or CD-R/ CD-RW (➡ 17).

The menu is automatically displayed.

USB

e.g.

USB device

Play Video (DivX)

Play Pictures (JPEG)

Copy Pictures (JPEG)

Play Music (MP3)

Copy Music (MP3)

Update CD database on HDD

SELECT

RETURN

2 Press [

] to select “Copy Music

e, r

(MP3)” and press [OK].

“Copy Direction” and “Copy Mode” are automatically set to “USB p HDD” or “CD p HDD” and “MUSIC, High Speed”, respectively.

3 Register MP3 ﬁ les for copy.

y If you are going to copy a registered list without making any

changes to it (➡ step 4).

You can register MP3 ﬁ les or MP3 ﬁ le folders. y MP3 ﬁ les and folders cannot be registered on the same list.

Copy

Cancel All

1 Copy Direction

USB t HDD

2 Copy Mode

MUSIC High Speed

3 Create List

Start Copying

RETURN

■ To register individual MP3 ﬁ les

1 Press [e, r] to select “Create List” and press [q]. 2 Press [e, r] to select “New item” and press [OK]. 3 Press [e, r] to select the folder and press [OK]. 4 Press [e, r] to select the MP3 ﬁ le and press [h].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.

y Press [h] again to cancel. y The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If

you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.

5 Press [OK].

y To edit the copying list (➡ 65)

6 Press [w] to conﬁ rm.

OPTION

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

Track/Folder

SizeNo.

New item (Total = 0)

Create copy list.

Page 01/01

Track

Name of item

RQT9090

■ To register on a folder by folder basis

1 Press [e, r] to select “Create List” and press [q]. 2 Press [e, r] to select “Track/Folder” and press [OK].

Copy

Cancel All

1 Copy Direction

USB t HDD

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

Track/Folder

SizeNo.

New item (Total = 0)

Track

Name of item

3 Press [e, r] to select “Folder” and press [OK]. 4 Press [e, r] to select “New item” and press [OK]. 5 Press [e, r] to select the folder and press [h].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.

y Press [h] again to cancel. y The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If

you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.

6 Press [OK].

y To edit the copying list (➡ below)

7 Press [w] to conﬁ rm.

4 Press [

] to select “Start Copying”

e, r

and press [OK].

y For individual ﬁ les only

When specifying an existing folder as the copying destination

1 Press [e, r] to select “Folder” and press [OK]. 2 Press [e, r] to select the folder and press [OK].

When creating a new folder as the copying destination

1 Press [w, q] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. 2 Enter the folder name (➡ 52, Entering text).

5 Press [

] to select “Yes” and press

w, q

[OK] to start copying.

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

Note

y The sequence in which the MP3 ﬁ les are registered on the

copying list may not be the same at the copy destination.

y If MP3 ﬁ les are already contained inside the copy destination

folder, the new MP3 ﬁ les are recorded following the existing MP3 ﬁ les.

■ To edit the copying list

Select the item after step 3-5 (for an MP3 ﬁ le) (➡ 64, Copying music (MP3) from a USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW) or 3-6 (for a folder) (➡ above).

1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [e, r] to select the operation and press

[OK].

Delete All:

Delete all items registered on the copying list. Press [w, q] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

Add:

Add new items to the copying list. 1 Press [e, r] to select the MP3 ﬁ le or folder and press [h].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items. y Press [h] again to cancel.

2 Press [OK].

Delete:

Delete the selected items. Press [w, q] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

To cancel all registered copying settings and lists

After performing steps 1-2 (➡ 64, Copying music (MP3) from a USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW) 1 Press [e, r] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK]. 2 Press [w, q] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. y The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.

–When a ﬁ le has been recorded or deleted at the copy source –When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,

remove the USB memory, open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.

Note

y If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of

ﬁ les/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (➡ 16), copying will stop partway through.

Delete All

Add

Delete

To update the Gracenote® Database

To update the database with information on CDs that were recently released, follow the instructions below.

■ Preparing the update data

1 Visit the following website.

http://panasonic.net/pavc/support/gn/

2 Download the data to your USB memory.

y USB memory 1 GB or larger is required. y Refer to the instruction on the website for more information.

■ Updating the database on this unit

3 Turn on this unit. 4 Insert the USB memory (➡ 17).

The menu is automatically displayed.

USB device

Play Video (DivX)

Play Pictures (JPEG)

Copy Pictures (JPEG)

Play Music (MP3)

Copy Music (MP3)

Update CD database on HDD

SELECT

RETURN

5 Press [e, r] to select “Update CD database on HDD” and press

[OK].

6 Press [w, q] to select “Update” and press [OK].

y Updating takes up to 20 minutes. y Do not disconnect the USB memory and the AC mains

lead while updating.

y Once started, you cannot cancel updating.

A message appears when updating is ﬁ nished.

7 Press [OK].

Note

y Timer recordings do not start while updating. y Updating overwrites the internal database forcibly regardless of

whether the data in the USB memory is the latest or not. Make sure you download the latest version from the website.

y Some of the CD title information in the database may be deleted

after updating the database.

y No name will be assigned after copying a CD to HDD if the CD

title information of the CD is not registered in the database. Even if the CD title information of that CD is added to the database by updating later, the information will not be assigned to the track/ album already copied on the HDD. (The names will be still blank.)

y Depending on the situation of Panasonic or Gracenote, upgrading

the Gracenote® Database and providing it through the Web may be discontinued without notice.

Copying music to HDD

RQT9090

Using on-screen menus/Status message

Using on-screen menus

Common procedures

1 Press [DISPLAY].

Disc

Play Picture Sound Other

Menu Item Setting

y Depending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped,

etc.) and disc contents, there are some items that you cannot select or change.

2 Press [

Soundtrack

Subtitle

Audio channel

] to select the menu and

e, r

press [q].

3 Press [

] to select the item and

e, r

press [q].

4 Press [

y Some items can be changed by pressing [OK].

To clear the on-screen menus

Press [DISPLAY].

Disc menu—Setting the disc content

Soundtrack*

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW -RW(VR)

The disc’s audio attributes appear.

DVD-V

Select the audio and language (➡ right, Audio attribute, Language).

VCD

(SVCD) and DivX

Select the soundtrack number. y Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only

one audio type.

Subtitle*

DVD-V

Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (➡ right, Language).

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW -RW(VR)

discs that contain subtitle on/off information) Turn the subtitle on/off. y Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.

VCD

(SVCD) and DivX

Turn the subtitle on/off and select the subtitle number. y Subtitle numbers are displayed even if there are not multiple

subtitles.

DVD-V

Angle*

Change the number to select an angle.

Audio channel

(➡ 34, Changing audio during play)

Source Select (DivX)

y Automatic:

The constructing method of the DivX contents is automatically distinguished and output.

y Interlace:

Select when the disc contents were recorded using interlace.

y Progressive:

Select when the disc contents were recorded using progressive.

PBC (Playback control ➡ 96)

Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.

* With some discs, you may only be able to make changes using

the menus (➡ 19) on the disc.

y The display changes according to the disc content. You cannot

change when there is no recording.

] to select the setting.

e, r

HDD RAM -RW(VR) VCD

Off

(Only

and DivX

VCD

Audio attribute

LPCM/%Digital/DTS/MPEG: k (kHz): b (bit): ch (channel):

Language

ENG: FRA: DEU: ITA: ESP: NLD: SVE: NOR:

English French German Italian Spanish Dutch Swedish Norwegian

DAN: POR: RUS: JPN: CHI: KOR: MAL: VIE:

Signal type Sampling frequency Number of bits Number of channels

Danish Portuguese Russian Japanese Chinese Korean Malay Vietnamese

THA: POL: CES: SLK: HUN: FIN: ¼:

Thai Polish Czech Slovak Hungarian Finnish Others

Play menu—Change the play sequence

This function works only when the elapsed play time is displayed. Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items that can be selected will differ.

Repeat Play

y All y Chapter

y Group y PL (Playlist) y Title

y Track

Select “Off” to cancel.

CD VCD HDD

RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL

+RW

DVD-V -RW(VR)

MP3 (except

HDD RAM -RW(VR) HDD +RW CD

VCD

USB

)

RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL

DVD-V -RW(VR)

and MP3 (except

USB

)

Picture menu—Change the picture quality

Playback NR

Reduces noise and picture degradation.

Progressive* (➡ 96)

Select “On” to enable progressive output. Select “Off” if the picture is stretched horizontally.

Transfer* [When “Progressive” (➡ above) is set to “On”.]

Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit the type of title being played (➡ 96, Film and video).

When the output signal is PAL (When the tray is opened, the setting will return to “Auto”.)

y Auto:

y Video:

y Film:

When the output signal is NTSC

y Auto1

(normal):

y Auto2:

y Video:

Input NR

Reduces the noise while recording (Except analogue channels).

y Automatic:

Noise reduction only works on picture input from a video tape.

y On:

Noise reduction works for input video.

y Off:

Noise reduction is off. You can record the input signal as it is.

* Only when you have set “Progressive” to “On” in the Setup menu

(➡ 75).

Automatically detects the ﬁ lm and video content, and appropriately converts it. Select when using “Auto”, and the content is distorted. Select this if the edges of the ﬁ lm content appear jagged or rough when “Auto” is selected. However, if the video content is distorted as shown in the illustration to the right, then select “Auto”.

Automatically detects the ﬁ lm and video content, and appropriately converts it. In addition to “Auto1”, automatically detects ﬁ lm contents with different frame rates and appropriately converts it. Select when using “Auto1” and “Auto2”, and the content is distorted.

RQT9090

Sound menu—Change the DVB multi audio and sound effect

DVB Multi Audio

[Digital channel only]

If more than one audio channel is output, you can set the desired channel before recording. y DVB Multi Audio cannot be selected during playback or

recording.

y Depending on the broadcast, the items that can be selected

will differ.

For Germany

y English y Italian y Spanish

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

y English y Italian y Spanish y Basque y Corsican

* “Original” is displayed when a broadcast is only available in

the original language.

V.S.S.

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW DVD-V -RW(VR)

(Dolby Digital, MPEG, 2-channel or over only)

Enjoy a surround-like effect if you are using two front speakers only. y Turn V.S.S. off if it causes distortion. (Check the surround

function on the connected equipment.)

y V.S.S. does not work for bilingual recordings.

Dialogue Enhancer

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW DVD-V -RW(VR)

and DivX (Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a centre channel)

The volume of the centre channel is raised to make dialogue easier to hear.

y German y French y Original*

y German y French y Catalan y Galician y Original*

Status messages

Press [STATUS ].

The display changes each time you press the button.

Selected drive status/type of disc or USB HDD

REC

PLAY

1 DVB

ABC

L R

DVD REC

Title number and elapsed time during play/ Recording mode

Date and time

18:53:50 11.10.

T1 0:05.14 XP

y When using Pause Live TV

The time when the picture currently displayed on the television was broadcast

Play 15:05:13

memory

The remaining time appears here while stopped.

Recording or play status/input channel

Channel

The name of the station (Digital broadcast only).

Selected audio type

Recording drive/Copy progress indicator

Available recording time and recording mode

Remain 13:05 XP

T2 0:00.10 XP

Title number and elapsed time during recording/ Recording mode

Live 15:10:46

Current time

Using on-screen menus/Status message

Other menu—Change the DVB subtitle and display position

DVB Subtitle

[Digital channel only]

You can set the desired subtitles if more than one subtitle track can be selected. y DVB Subtitle cannot be selected during playback or

recording.

y Depending on the broadcast, the items that can be selected

will differ.

y English y Italian y Spanish y Basque y Corsican

Position

1–5: The higher the setting the lower the on-screen menu moves.

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

y German y French y Catalan y Galician

No display

RQT9090

HDD, disc and card management

01/02

01 02

(

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW -RW(VR) SD

Common procedures

Preparation

y Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [

press [OK].

FUNCTION MENU

HDD

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

To Others

3 Press [

Management”, “DVD Management” or “Card Management” and press [OK].

RAM

e.g.,

DVD Management

DVD-RAM

SELECT

RETURN

y When HDD has been selected, “Delete all titles” and

“Format HDD” are displayed.

y When SD has been selected, “Format Card” only is

displayed.

] to select “To Others” and

e, r

30:00 SP

Remain

Timer Recording

ShowView Record

Advanced Copy

Playlists

Flexible Rec

DV Auto Rec

Setup

HDD Management

RETURN

] to select “HDD

e, r

Titles Used

0 : 22

Disc Name

Disc Protection

Delete all titles

Format Disc

Remain

5:38 (EP)

Off

Setting the protection

RAM

Preparation

y Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)

1 Press [

] to select “Disc

e, r

Protection” and press [OK].

2 Press [

] to select “Yes” and press

w, q

[OK].

DVD Management

DVD-RAM

SELECT

RETURN

The lock symbol appears closed when the disc is writeprotected.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Cartridge—protection

For a DVD-RAM with a cartridge

y With the write-protect tab in the protect position,

play automatically starts when inserted in the unit.

Switch the write-protect switch to the “LOCK” position.

Titles

0 : 22

Used

Disc Name

Disc Protection

Delete all titles

Format Disc

Remain

5:38 (EP)

PROTECT

KCOL

Providing a name for a disc

RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

You can provide a name for each disc.

Preparation

y Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

RAM

Release protection (➡ above, Setting the protection).

After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)

1 Press [

] to select “Disc Name”

e, r

and press [OK].

(➡ 52, Entering text) y The disc name is displayed in the DVD Management window.

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL

displayed on the Top Menu.

+RW

The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on other

equipment after creating top menu.

DVD Management

DVD-RAM

Documentary

Titles Used

11 0 : 22

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

With a ﬁ nalised disc, the name is

Remain

5:38

My favorite

Chapter 1 Chapter 2

RQT9090

Deleting all titles and playlists— Delete all titles

HDD RAM

Preparation

y Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.

RAM

Release protection (➡ 68, Setting the protection).

After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 68, Common procedures)

1 Press [

] to select “Delete all

e, r

titles” and press [OK].

2 Press [

] to select “Yes” and press

w, q

[OK].

3 Press [

] to select “Start” and

w, q

press [OK].

A message appears when ﬁ nished.

4 Press [OK].

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Note

y Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be

restored. Make certain before proceeding.

y Deleting all video titles will result in all playlists also being deleted. y Still picture data (JPEG), music data or computer data cannot be

deleted.

y Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.

Deleting all the contents—Format

HDD RAM -RW(V) +RW -RW(VR) +R

+R DL

Preparation

y Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.

RAM SD

Note

Formatting deletes all contents (including computer data), and they cannot be restored. Check carefully before proceeding. The contents are deleted when you format a disc or

card even if you have set protection.

After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 68, Common procedures)

1 Press [

(New disc only)

Release protection (➡ 68, Setting the protection).

] to select “Format HDD”,

e, r

“Format Disc” or “Format Card” and press [OK].

2 Press [

] to select “Yes” and press

w, q

[OK].

3 Press [

] to select “Start” and

w, q

press [OK].

A message appears when formatting is ﬁ nished.

Note

y Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however, it may

take up to a maximum of 70 minutes (

y Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.

This can render the disc or the card unusable.

RAM

4 Press [OK].

Note

y When a disc or card has been formatted using this unit, it may not

be possible to use it on any other equipment.

-R -R DL CD

y y You can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video format on this unit.

To stop formatting

Press [RETURN]. y You can cancel formatting if it takes more than 2 minutes. The disc

must be reformatted if you do this.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Formatting cannot be performed.

RAM

HDD, disc and card management

RQT9090

HDD, disc and card management

RQT9090

Selecting the background style—Top Menu

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

You can select the background that will be displayed as the DVDVideo top menu after ﬁ nalising or Create Top Menu (

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 68, Common procedures)

1 Press [

] to select “Top Menu” and

e, r

+RW

press [OK].

2 Press [

e, r, w, q

] to select the

background and press [OK].

Top Menu List

Display after ﬁ nalising

Thumbnail (Still picture)

y You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu.

(➡ 47, Change Thumbnail)

7 8

Title Name

Selecting whether to show the Top Menu ﬁ rst—Auto-Play Select

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

You can select whether to show the top menu after ﬁ nalising.

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 68, Common procedures)

1 Press [

] to select “Auto-Play

e, r

Select” and press [OK].

2 Press [

] to select “Top Menu” or

e, r

“Title 1” and press [OK].

Top Menu: The top menu appears ﬁ rst. Title 1: The disc content is played without displaying

the top menu.

Enabling discs to be played on other equipment—Finalise

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL

Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (➡ above) before ﬁ nalising the disc.

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 68, Common procedures)

1 Press [

] to select “Finalise” and

e, r

press [OK].

2 Press [

] to select “Yes” and press

w, q

[OK].

3 Press [

] to select “Start” and

w, q

press [OK].

A message appears when ﬁ nalising is ﬁ nished.

Note

y You cannot cancel ﬁ nalising. y Finalising takes up to 15 minutes.

-R DL +R DL

(

y Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while ﬁ nalising.

This will render the disc unusable.

Finalising takes up to 60 minutes.)

4 Press [OK].

Note

When ﬁ nalising a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may take longer than displayed on the conﬁ rmation screen (approximately four times).

After ﬁ nalising

-R -R DL +R +R DL

no longer record or edit.

-RW(V)

y When copying in high speed, chapters will be replicated. y

y There is a pause of several seconds between titles and chapters

Recording/Editing/Entering name

Play on other players –

y You cannot ﬁ nalise discs recorded on other manufacturer’s

y If you ﬁ nalise discs recorded on Panasonic equipment other than

y Discs ﬁ nalised on this unit may not be playable on other players

Visit Panasonic’s homepage for more information about DVDs.

http://www.panasonic-europe.com

You can record and edit the disc after formatting

(➡ 69) although it becomes play-only after ﬁ nalising.

-R -RW(V)

chapters, if – the titles were directly recorded to the disc. – the titles were copied using the normal speed mode (excluding

* This time varies greatly depending on the condition and mode

during play.

equipment.

this unit, the background selected as “Top Menu” may not be displayed.

due to the condition of the recording.

Titles are divided into about 5-minute (

-R DL +R DL

of recording.

The disc becomes play-only and you can

Before

ﬁ nalising

{

8-minute)*

After

ﬁ nalising

–

{

Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu

+RW

+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a convenient function. We recommend you create the menu before playing a +RW disc on other equipment.

You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.

Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (➡ left) before creating top menu.

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 68, Common procedures)

1 Press [

] to select “Create Top

e, r

Menu” and press [OK].

2 Press [

] to select “Yes” and press

w, q

[OK].

3 Press [

] to select “Start” and

w, q

press [OK].

Creating Top Menu starts. You cannot cancel creating. Creating Top Menu can take a few minutes.

4 Press [OK].

Note

y You can record or edit discs after creating the Top Menu. But the

created menu is deleted when you record or edit disc. In such cases, create the Top Menu again by using “Create Top Menu”.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Changing the unit’s settings

RETURN

SELECT

2 ABC

20 ABC HDTV

MHz

RETURN

010 010

498,0

OFFSET

START SCAN

CHANNEL

You can change the unit’s settings using Setup menu. y The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.

Common procedures

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [

press [OK].

3 Press [

press [OK].

Tabs Menus Options

Setup

Tuning Disc Picture Sound Display Connection VHS Others

4 Press [

press [q].

5 Press [

press [OK].

6 Press [

press [OK].

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Tuning

■ Edit Proﬁ les

You can create four proﬁ les of channels for making viewing and recording easier. Editing these proﬁ les does not affect the channel setting itself. y Timer recording may not work correctly if you edit the proﬁ les

during timer recording standby.

Press the “Green” button to select the proﬁ le.

Edit Proﬁ les

All Services

Proﬁ le Select Add

To add channels to a proﬁ le

1 Press [e, r] to select the channel in the “All Services” column

and press the “Yellow” button.

y Repeat this step to add other channels. y Press the “Blue” button to add all the available channels to the

proﬁ le. (This is possible only when no channels have been added to the proﬁ le.)

2 Press [OK] to save the proﬁ le.

To change the order of channels of a proﬁ le

1 Press [q]*. 2 Press [e, r] to select the channel in the “Proﬁ le” column to move

and press the “Green” button.

3 Press [e, r] to select the new position of the channel and press

the “Green” button.

y Repeat the steps 2 – 3 to move other channels.

4 Press [OK] to save the proﬁ le.

To delete channels on a proﬁ le

1 Press [q]*. 2 Press [e, r] to select the channel in the “Proﬁ le” column and

press the “Yellow” button. y Repeat this step to delete other channels.

] to select “To Others” and

e, r

] to select “Setup” and

e, r

Remote Control Clock Power Save Quick Start DivX Registration System Update Initialize

SELECT

e, r

Proﬁ le 1

DVD 1

Off On

TAB

RETURN

] to select the tab and

] to select the menu and

] to select the option and

Add All

Page Page

y Press the “Blue” button to delete all the channels from the

proﬁ le.

3 Press [OK] to save the proﬁ le.

Deleting a channel from a proﬁ le does not affect the channel itself. You can still select the channel from the “All Services” proﬁ le.

To change the name of a proﬁ le in the “Proﬁ le” column

1 Press [q]*. 2 Press the “Red” button.

(➡ 52, Entering text)

* When the station name of the “All Services” column is highlighted

■ Auto-Setup Restart Download from TV

You can restart auto channel setting if set up (➡ 12) fails for some reason.

Select “Download from TV” when you connect the unit to a Q Link compatible TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable or a VIERA Link (HDAVI Control 3) compatible TV with an HDMI cable.

When the conﬁ rmation screen appears

Press [w, q] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

You can also use the following method to restart Auto-Setup. When the unit is on and stopped

Press and hold [2 CH] and [CH 1] on the main unit until the country setting screen or the DVB Auto-Setup screen appears.

All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and clock settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.

■ Settings for Digital Services

Press [OK] to show the following settings.

DVB Manual Tuning

You can set channels manually that the DVB Auto-Setup could not complete successfully. 1 Press [e, r] to select “DVB Manual Tuning” and press [OK].

DVB Manual Tuning

Channel System

Frequency

Signal Quality Signal Strength

Prog. Channel Service Name

2 Press [e, r] to select the channel you want to set. 3 Press [w, q] to adjust the frequency.

y The frequency rises and falls in steps of 0.5 MHz. y Adjust the frequency by checking the signal strength and signal

quality displays. [Refer to “Signal Condition” (➡ 72) for signal quality and signal strength.]

4 Press [OK] to start scan.

The set channel is displayed in the table.

5 Press [EXIT] and press [1 2 CH] to check that applicable

channels have been selected.

Add New DVB Services

You can search for newly added terrestrial digital channels to receive. 1 Press [e, r] to select “Add New DVB Services” and press [OK].

The unit starts searching for newly available terrestrial digital channels. This takes about 5 minutes.

Please wait!

Prog. Channel Service Name

RETURN: to cancel

RETURN

A message is displayed when the search is ﬁ nished. “No new services found.” is displayed when no new services can be found.

2 Press [OK] to save the newly found channels.

Western Europe (CCIR)Western Europe (CCIR) DVB CH24

Net ID TS ID Quality

Add New DVB Services

Ch 5 69

Net ID TS ID Quality

Change Channel System

If there is no picture, press the “Red” button and select the correct channel system.

HDD, disc and card management/Changing the unit’s settings

RQT9090

Changing the unit’s settings

Signal Condition

You can check the quality and strength of digital broadcast signals. Realign the aerial if you are receiving a poor signal.

When “Signal Condition” is displayed in grey and cannot be selected: 1 Press [EXIT] to exit the screen. 2 Press [1 2 CH] to select a digital channel. “D” appears on the

unit’s display. 3 Display the Setup menu again (➡ 71). Press [e, r] to select “Signal Condition” and press [OK]. The quality and strength of the signal are shown. Press [1 2 CH] to select the channel.

2 ABC 2W DVB CH

Signal Quality

Signal Strength

RETURN

010 010

CH + CH –

Signal Quality

Below 2 (display red): The signal quality is so poor that there may be interference in the pictures and sound. 2–5 (display orange): The signal quality is basically adequate, but brief interference in the pictures and sound is possible in isolated case. Over 5 (display green): Optimum picture and sound quality.

Signal Strength

The display for signal strength is grey. “0” means signal strength 0%, “10” means signal strength 100%. If the signal is too strong, the display will change from grey to red. Reduce the signal ampliﬁ cation at your aerial. y When the signal is weak:

– adjust the position and direction of the aerial. – adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning” in the Setup

menu (➡ 71).

– check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly

broadcasting.

DVB Preferred Language

Press [e, r] to select “DVB Preferred Language” and press [OK].

You can select up to 2 different subtitles

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

(

) and audio tracks to be used when audio and subtitles digital broadcasts are received. Select the order of priority. If the selected language is not available, then the original language will be selected.

Multi-Audio Multi-Audio (alternative)

For Germany

[English] [German] [Italian] [French] [Spanish]

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

[English] [German] [Italian] [French] [Spanish] [Catalan] [Basque] [Galician] [Corsican]

Subtitle Subtitle (alternative)

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

[English] [German] [Italian] [French] [Spanish] [Catalan] [Basque] [Galician] [Corsican]

■ Settings for Analogue Services

Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Manual Tuning

You can delete analogue channels and set the analogue channel details. Press [OK] to show Manual Tuning screen.

Manual Tuning

Pos NameChPos N ame

SELECT

RETURN

Delete

Move

Add

1 ARD 4 2 ZDF 2 3 N3 5 4 HR3 8 5 BR3 10 6 7 8 9

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

To delete a programme position

Press [e, r, w, q] to select a programme position and press the “Red” button.

Note

For Germany

This unit does not support SECAM L, L’.

To change the tuning settings for individual programme position

1 Press [e, r, w, q] to select a programme position and press

[OK].

For Germany For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

Manual Tuning

SELECT

RETURN

RETURN : leave

Pos Name Channel Fine Tuning Video System Mono Title Page

901

ARD

Auto Auto

Off

301

Manual

Tuning

SELECT

RETURN

RETURN : leave

Pos Name Channel Fine Tuning Video System Audio Mode Mono Title Page

901

ARD

Auto Auto

301

BG Off

2 Press [e, r] to select an item and press [q].

Pos Programme position in the table

(You cannot change the programme position.)

Name To enter or change the name of a TV

station

Press [e, r, w, q] to enter station name and press [OK]. If the station name needs a blank space, select the blank between “Z” and “¼”.

Channel To enter newly available TV stations or

change the channel number of an already tuned TV station

Press [e, r] or the numbered buttons to enter the channel number of the desired TV station. Wait a few moments until the desired TV station has been tuned. After the desired TV station is tuned, press [OK].

Fine Tuning To obtain the best tuning condition

Press [e, r] to adjust the best tuning condition and press [OK]. y Press [q] to return to “Auto”.

Video System To select the video system type

Press [e, r] to select “PAL” or “SECAM” if the picture lacks colour, and press [OK]. y Auto

This unit automatically distinguishes PAL and SECAM signals.

y PA L

For receiving PAL signals.

y SECAM

For receiving SECAM signals.

Audio Mode

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

To select the audio reception type

If sound quality is poor, press [e, r] to select “BG” or “L” and press [OK]. y BG

PAL B.G.H/SECAM B.G

y L

SECAM L, L’

Mono To select the type of sound to be recorded

Press [e, r] to select “On” if the stereo sound is distorted due to inferior reception conditions, or if you want to record the normal (mono) sound during a stereo, bilingual or NICAM broadcast, and press [OK].

Title Page To enter the Teletext title page for a

channel

Entering title page number allows the unit to automatically record programme and station names. Press [e, r] or numbered buttons to enter the number and press [OK]. y To ﬁ nd the correct title page for the station,

refer to its Teletext TV guide.

RQT9090

You can make the following two settings by selecting the external input channel (AV1, AV2, AV3) in step 1. y Video System (Auto/PAL/SECAM)

In order to record properly, make the appropriate settings to match the connected equipment.

y Title Page (Auto/Off)

Disc

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

Settings for Playback

y Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Ratings

Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit password with the numbered buttons when the password screen is shown.

Do not forget your password.

Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected)

[8 No Limit] All DVD-Video can be played.

[1 to 7] Prohibits play of DVD-Video with

[0 Lock All] Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.

y Changing settings (When level 0 to 7 is selected)

[Unlock Recorder] [Change Password]

[Change Level] [Temporary Unlock]

Soundtrack

[English] [German] [French] [Italian]

[Spanish] [Dutch] [Swedish]

[Original] The original language of each disc will be

[Other ¼¼¼¼]*

Subtitle

[Automatic] If the language selected for “Soundtrack” is not

[English] [German] [French] [Italian]

[Spanish] [Dutch] [Swedish]

[Other ¼¼¼¼]*

Menus

[English] [German] [French] [Italian]

[Spanish] [Dutch] [Swedish]

[Other ¼¼¼¼]*

* [Other ¼¼¼¼]

Enter a code (➡ 85) with the numbered buttons. When the selected language is not available on the disc, the default language is played. There are discs where you can only switch the language from the menu screen (➡ 19).

DVD-V

Choose the language for audio, subtitle and disc menus. y Some discs start in a certain language despite any changes you

make here.

y In case of English/French/German/Italian/Spanish languages,

when you make download from TV, or Country setting

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

( (“Soundtrack”/“Menus”) will be same and “Subtitle” will set to “Automatic”.

Settings for Recording

y Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Recording time in EP mode

Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP mode (➡ 24, HDD and DVD recording modes and approximate recording times).

[EP (6 Hours)] You can record for 6 hours on an unused

[EP (8 Hours)] You can record for 8 hours on an unused

y The sound quality is better when using “EP (6 Hours)” than

when using “EP (8 Hours)”.

corresponding ratings recorded on them.

selected.

available, subtitles of that language will automatically appear if available on that disc.

) of Auto-Setup, the language

4.7 GB disc.

Aspect for Recording

Sets the aspect ratio when recording or copying.

[16:9] [4:3]

y When recording or copying to the HDD or DVD-RAM with “Rec

for High Speed Copy” set to “Off”, programme will be recorded in the original aspect ratio.

y In the following cases, even when set to “16:9”, recordings will

be made or copied in 4:3.

-R -R DL -RW(V)

–

“FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode – When recording or copying to a +R, +R DL and +RW High-speed copy does not work for the titles recorded in 16:9 even if they were recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “On”.

When the recording mode is set to “EP” or

Rec for High Speed Copy

You can copy recorded titles from the HDD to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using high speed mode. However, screen size, etc. is restricted (➡ below). We recommend turning the setting “Off” if high speed copy to DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme. This setting is effective when recording from a television programme or external equipment (including DV equipment), or when copying from a ﬁ nalised DVD-Video disc.

[On] You can high-speed copy to DVD-R, etc. Press

[Off]

[w, q] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. y The following restrictions are applied to

recorded titles. – Recordings are made using the aspect ratio

set in “Aspect for Recording” (➡ above).

– Select the type of audio in advance from

“Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ 74). You are no longer able to switch the audio when

–

watching a programme on an input channel on the TV connected to this unit (e.g., AV1, etc).

DVD Speed for High Speed Copy

Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high-speed copy compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R, +R 8X or +RW 4X discs).

[Maximum]

[Normal (Silent)] The noise generated by this unit is less

than when “Maximum” is selected, however the time required for copying will double (approximately).

Picture

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

Comb Filter

Select the picture sharpness when recording. The setting is ﬁ xed with “On” if you set “TV System” to “NTSC” (➡ 75).

[On] Pictures become clear and vivid. Normally, use this

[Off] Select it when recording noisy pictures.

Still Mode

Select the type of picture shown when you pause play (➡ 96, Frames and ﬁ elds).

[Automatic]

[Field] Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is

[Frame] Select if small text or ﬁ ne patterns cannot be seen

Seamless Play

Select the play mode between playlist chapter segments and partially deleted titles.

[On] The chapters in playlists are played seamlessly.

[Off] The points where chapters in playlists change are

setting.

selected. (The picture is coarser.)

clearly when “Automatic” is selected. (The picture is clearer and ﬁ ner.)

This does not work when there are several audio types included on the playlist and when using Quick View (PLAY ×1.3). Additionally, the positioning of chapter segments may change slightly.

played accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.

Changing the unit’s settings

RQT9090

Changing the unit’s settings

RQT9090

Sound

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

Dynamic Range Compression

DVD-V

(Dolby Digital only)

Change the dynamic range for late night viewing.

[On]

Bilingual Audio Selection

(Analogue broadcast only) Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type when: y Recording or copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW

(DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW.

y “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (➡ 73). y Recording or copying sound in LPCM (➡ right, “Audio Mode for

XP Recording”).

[M 1] [M 2]

y You cannot select the audio on this unit when recording from an

external source, such as when copying from a video cassette recorder (except from DV equipment connected to this unit’s DV input terminal). Select the audio on the other equipment.

y When recording from the unit’s DV terminal, select the type of

audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input” (➡ right).

Digital Audio Output

Change the settings when you have connected equipment through this unit’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (➡ 82). y Press [OK] to show the following settings.

PCM Down Conversion

Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz. y Signals are converted to 48 kHz despite the settings below if

the signals have a sampling frequency of over 96 kHz, or the disc has copy protection.

[On] Signals are converted to 48 kHz. (Choose when

[Off] Signals are output as 96 kHz. (Choose when the

Dolby Digital

Select how to output the signal. Select “Bitstream” if the connected equipment decodes the signal. Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal and outputs it as 2 channels. y Not making the proper settings may

result in noise.

[Bitstream] When connecting to equipment displaying the

[PCM] When connecting to equipment not displaying the

DTS

result in noise.

[Bitstream] When connecting to

[PCM] When connecting to

MPEG

[Bitstream] When connected to equipment with a built-in

[PCM] When connected to equipment without a built-in

[Off]

the connected equipment cannot process signals with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)

connected equipment can process signals with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)

Dolby Digital logo.

equipment displaying the DTS logo.

equipment not displaying the DTS logo.

MPEG decoder.

Audio Mode for XP Recording

Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP mode.

[Dolby Digital] (➡ 96) [LPCM] (➡ 96)

y The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than that

of normal XP mode recordings. y The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you selected

LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP. y When recording a bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio

in advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ left).

Audio Mode for DV Input

You can select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s DV input terminal (➡ 29).

[Stereo 1] Records audio (L1, R1).

[Stereo 2] Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)

[Mix] Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.

y When recording bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in

advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ left).

subsequent to original recording.

Display

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

Language

Choose the language for these menus and on-screen messages.

For Germany

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

[English] [Deutsch] [Français] [Italiano]

[Español]

On-Screen Messages

Choose the approximate time until the digital channel information screen (➡ 18) disappears automatically. The length of time the control panel (➡ 45) is displayed can also be changed, but “Off” does not work.

[Off] (The digital channel information is not displayed.)

[3 sec.] [5 sec.] [7 sec.] [10 sec.]

Grey Background

Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the grey background when tuner reception is weak.

[On] [Off]

FL Display

Changes the brightness of the unit’s display. This setting is ﬁ xed with “Automatic” if you set “Power Save” (➡ 77) to “On”.

[Bright] [Dim]

[Automatic] The display turns dark during play and disappears

New Service Messages (➡ 18)

When a new DVB channel is added this unit will be informed automatically. Then the conﬁ rmation message appears. If you select “Yes” on the display, Auto-Setup starts (All channel settings and all created proﬁ les are deleted. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.).

[Automatic]

[Off] The service messages are not shown.

Pause Live TV Icon

Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the onscreen icon while using the Pause Live TV function.

[On] [Off]

[English] [Deutsch]

when the unit is turned off. It reappears momentarily if a button is pressed. While using this mode, the standby power consumption can be reduced.

Connection

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.) Depending on the connected equipment, some items may be shaded in grey on the display and cannot be selected, or you may not be able to change the settings.

TV Aspect

Set to match the type of television connected.

[16:9] When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television.

[Pan & Scan] When connected to a 4:3 aspect

[Letterbox] When connected to a 4:3 aspect

Progressive

You can enjoy progressive video by connecting this unit’s COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals to an LCD/plasma television or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan. This setting is ﬁ xed with “Off” if you set “AV1 Output” to “RGB 1 (without component)” or “RGB 2 (without component)”.

[On] [Off]

Note

y When connected to a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube)

or a multi-system television using PAL mode, even if it is progressive compatible, progressive output can cause some ﬂ ickering. Turn off “Progressive” if you are concerned about it (➡ 66).

y Picture will not be displayed correctly if connected to an

incompatible television.

TV System

Change the setting to match the equipment you are connecting with, or to match the title when there are both PAL and NTSC titles on the HDD.

[PAL]

[NTSC]

Note

y This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have

PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)

y If “NTSC” has been selected, the TV Guide system cannot be

used.

y During recording, timer recording standby or EXT LINK standby,

this unit cannot play discs or titles that do not match the “TV System” setting. It is recommended “TV System” be set to match the discs or title before playing them.

To change the setting all at once (PAL'NTSC)

While stopped, keep pressing [g] and [; OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.

television, side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture.

television, 16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style.

y Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-

system television. Titles recorded using NTSC are played as PAL 60.

y Select to record television programmes and

PAL input from other equipment.

HDD

Select when playing a PAL input title

recorded on the HDD.

y Select when connecting to an NTSC television.

Television programmes cannot be recorded properly.

y Select to record NTSC input from other

equipment.

HDD

Select when playing an NTSC input title

recorded on the HDD.

HDMI Settings

y Press [OK] to show the following settings.

HDMI Video Format

You can only select items compatible with the connected equipment. This setting normally does not need to be changed. However if you are concerned about output picture quality, it may be improved by changing the setting. y To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p, you need

to connect the unit directly to 1080p compatible HDTV. If this unit is connected to an HDTV through other equipment, it must also be 1080p compatible.

[576i/480i] [576p/480p] [720p] [1080i]

[1080p] When outputting 1080p signal, we recommend

using High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover) and are less than 5 meters to prevent video distortion etc.

[Automatic] Automatically selects the output resolution best

suited to the connected television (1080p, 1080i, 720p, 576p/480p or 576i/480i).

Aspect for 4:3 Video

To play a 4:3 title when connected with an HDMI cable, set how to show pictures on a 16:9 widescreen television.

[4:3] Picture output expands left or right.

[16:9] Picture is output as original aspect

with side panels.

Digital Audio Output

[HDMI and Optical]

[Optical Only] Select when this unit is connected to an

ampliﬁ er with an optical digital audio cable (➡ 82) and connected to a TV with an HDMI cable (➡ 11) and you want to enjoy the highest quality of audio from discs.

VIERA Link

Set to use “HDAVI Control” function when connected with an HDMI cable to a device that supports “HDAVI Control”.

[On]

[Off] Select when you do not want to use “HDAVI

Control”.

Changing the unit’s settings

RQT9090

Changing the unit’s settings

AV1 Output

Set according to the terminal of the connected TV. Select “Video (with component)” or “S Video (with component)” for component output (progressive output). If this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, you cannot select “RGB 1 (without component)” or “RGB 2 (without component)”.

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

When a decoder is connected, do not set to “RGB 1 (without component)”.

[Video (with component)]

Select when a TV is connected that can receive a composite signal.

[S Video (with component)]

Select when a TV is connected that can receive an S Video signal.

[RGB 1 (without component)]

Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal. If you always would like to view the picture from the unit in RGB signal, select this mode. The TV screen will automatically switch to display the picture from the unit when the unit is turned on.

[RGB 2 (without component)]

Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal. If you would like to switch to display the picture from the unit only when playback or viewing menus, select this mode.

AV2 Settings

Set to match the connected equipment. y Press [OK] to show the following settings.

AV2 Input

Set to “RGB/Video” or “RGB” when receiving or recording RGB output from external equipment.

[RGB/Video] [RGB] [Video] [S Video]

AV2 Connection (

This setting is ﬁ xed with “Ext” if you set “TV System” to “NTSC” (➡ 75).

[Decoder] When a decoder is connected to descramble the

[Ext] When the VCR or a digital satellite receiver is

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

scrambled signals (e.g., C+decoder).

connected.

)

Ext Link

This setting cannot be made when the “TV System” is set to “NTSC” (➡ 75).

[Ext Link 1] When this unit is connected to a satellite receiver

[Ext Link 2] When external equipment with a timer function is

Active Antenna (

[On] Select this when you will use indoor antenna.

[Off]

with a 21-pin Scart cable and this unit receives a control signal. Start and stop timings of recording are controlled by the control signal.

connected. When it turns on, recording starts. When it turns off, recording stops.

For Germany

)

VHS

Tape Length

Set the length of the tape you are using so the unit can show the correct remaining time.

[Auto (E-240)] The unit automatically distinguishes E30, -60,

-90, -120, -180, and -240 tapes.

[E-195] For E195 tape

[E-260] For E260 tape

[E-300] For E300 tape

Playback Colour System

[Automatic] Differentiates between PAL and MESECAM.

[PAL] If the PAL system is used.

[MESECAM] If the MESECAM system is used.

SQPB

To play back video cassettes recorded in S-VHS format (SQPB; S-VHS Quasi Playback)

[Automatic] This unit automatically detects the format in

which the recording was made and selects the same format for playback. However, picture distortion may appear. Therefore, set to [On] or [Off].

[On] Use this setting when playing back a cassette

tape recorded in the S-VHS format.

[Off] Use this setting when playing back a cassette

tape recorded in the VHS format only.

RQT9090

Others

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

Remote Control

Change the remote control code on the main unit and the remote control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic products close together.

[DVD 1] [DVD 2] [DVD 3]

Use “DVD 1”, the factory set code, under normal circumstances.

1 Press [e, r] to select the code (“DVD 1”, “DVD 2” or

“DVD 3”) and press [OK].

Setup

Tuning Disc Picture Sound

To change the code on the remote control 2 While pressing [OK], press and hold the numbered button

([1], [2] or [3]) for more than 5 seconds.

3 Press [OK].

■ When the following indicator appears on the unit’s display

Remote Control

Press “c” and “OK” together for more than 5 seconds on the remote control.

The unit’s remote control code

Clock

This unit usually obtains time and date information from digital broadcasts and automatically corrects the time several times a day. However, if the time is not set correctly use the settings listed in the method below. y In the case of a power failure, the clock setting remains in

memory for approximately 60 minutes.

1 Press [e, r] to select “Off” of “Automatic” and press [OK].

For Germany

e.g., This screen appears while receiving a digital broadcast.

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

e.g., This screen appears while receiving a digital broadcast.

CHANGE

Number

0 9

CHANGE

Number

0 9

RETURN

Clock

Time Date

15 :45 :39 1 . 8 .

Please set clock manually.

SELECT

OK: store RETURN: leave

Time offset ➡ below

Clock

Automatic

Time Date

15 :45 :

Please set clock manually.

SELECT

OK: access RETURN: leave

Automatic

Time offset

3 . 8 .

2008

AutoOn

2008

Off

Changing the unit’s settings

Change the code on the remote control to match the main unit’s (➡ step 2).

Note

Executing “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu returns the main unit code to “DVD 1”. Change the remote control code to 1 (➡ step 2).

2 Press [w, q] to select the item you want to change.

The items change as follows: Hour Minute Second Day Month Year

3 Press [e, r] to change the setting.

You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.

4 Press [OK] when you have ﬁ nished the settings.

The clock starts.

Note

If a TV station transmits a time setting signal, and when “Automatic” in the Clock setting menu is set to “On”, the automatic time correction function checks the time and if necessary it is adjusted several times every day.

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

■ To change the time offset

When the time is not correct, select the region that matches where you live and set “Time offset” (from –2h to +2h). 1 Press [e, r] to select “On” of “Automatic” and press [OK] in

step 1. 2 Press [e, r] to select the correct time offset and press [OK]. 3 Press [OK].

Auto clock setting starts. This takes a few minutes.

“Automatic clock setting completed.” screen is displayed. 4 Press [RETURN].

Power Save

[On] Power consumption is minimized when the unit is

turned to standby (➡ 95).

[Off]

(If “Quick Start” is set to “On”, “Power Save” is automatically turned to “Off”.) y Refer to the following when “Power Save” is set to “On”.

– “FL Display” is automatically set to “Automatic” (➡ 74). – The “Quick Start” function does not work. (It is automatically

turned to “Off”.)

– When the unit is off, Pay TV programmes cannot be watched

on the TV because the signal from the connected decoder is

not looped through. To watch them, turn on the unit.

RQT9090

Changing the unit’s settings

RQT9090

Quick Start

1 Sec. Quick Start for Recording & EPG Display

(When connecting to TV using 21-pin Scart, COMPONENT VIDEO, VIDEO or S VIDEO terminals) From the power on, recording on DVD-RAM and HDD starts in about 1 second after the REC button is pressed. If the GUIDE button is pressed while the unit is off, the Electronic Program Guide (EPG) displays in less than 1 second. (Quick Start Mode)

[On]

[Off] Standby power consumption is less than when this

is set to “On”.

(If this is set to “On”, “Power Save” is automatically turned to “Off”.) y Startup takes up to a minute when:

– You play a disc or start recording to discs other than

DVD-RAM. – You want to make other operations. – The clock has not been set.

y Depending on the type of TV or the connected terminal, it may

take time to display the screen.

DivX Registration

You need this registration code to purchase and play DivX Videoon-Demand (VOD) content (➡ 37).

System Update

In order to update this unit’s software, the TV Guide download, and to support system changes made by broadcasts, this unit periodically performs software updates. Press [OK] to show the following settings. y Update data and TV Guide download information is sent by an

unscheduled digital broadcast. In order to receive these updates, you must be able to receive digital broadcasts.

y An update will take approximately 60 minutes. While the update

is in progress, “SW-DL” appears on the unit’s display. You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete. Removing the AC mains lead while the update is in progress may damage the unit.

y TV Guide download will take approximately 60 minutes. While

the TV Guide download is in progress, “GUIDE” appears on the unit’s display. The TV Guide download can be interrupted by switching on the unit.

TV Guide Download in Standby

[On] When you set this unit to standby mode, TV

Guide data is downloaded automatically.

[Off]

y In the area where GUIDE Plus+ system is available, the

setting is ﬁ xed to “On” automatically.

Software Update in Standby

[On] When you set this unit to standby mode, software

updates are downloaded automatically.

[Off]

TV Guide/Software search period

Selects the time to automatically perform TV Guide download and updates when the unit is set to standby mode. This can only be set when “TV Guide Download in Standby” and “Software Update in Standby” is set to “On”. y If there is a programmed recording set for the time you have

selected, the programmed recording will be given priority.

[Automatic]*

[02:00–06:00] [06:00–10:00] [10:00–14:00]

[14:00–18:00] [18:00–22:00] [22:00–02:00]

In the area where GUIDE Plus+ system is available:

[Automatic]* [Daytime] (06:00-22:00)

* The unit will give priority to searching for TV Guide download

and update data at midnight.

Software Update Search Now

Start the search for new software manually. A new software version is announced by a message. Do not turn your unit off during the update. This could result in the loss of data. A message shows that the update has ﬁ nished. If a new software version is not going to be broadcast for the next few days, a corresponding message also appears.

y If applicable update data is found, press [w, q] to select “Yes”

and press [OK].

For Germany, Italy and Spain

GUIDE Plus+ Data Download Now

Start downloading GUIDE Plus+ data. y If this is performed in standby mode for timer recording, timer

recording may not work correctly.

For Germany, Italy and Spain

GUIDE Plus+ System Information

You can check the condition of GUIDE Plus+ system of this unit. y This service may not be available in some areas in the above

countries.

For Germany, Italy and Spain

Post Code

You can input the postal code which is necessary to download area speciﬁ c information of GUIDE Plus+ system.

Initialize

y Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Shipping Condition

All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and clock settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.

[Yes] [No]

Default Settings

All the settings other than the tuning settings, clock settings, country settings ( settings, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings password, remote control code, return to the factory presets.

[Yes]

List of TV Reception Channels

Tuner

System

PAL-BGH

SECAM-BG

SECAM-LL’ France 2 – 10 21 – 69 B – Q

DVB-T Germany

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

[No]

Channel

Coverage

CCIR E2 – E12

France

Italy

Spain

Switzerland

VHF UHF CATV

A – H2

(Italy)

5 – 12 5 – 10

D – H2

5 – 12 5 – 12

), language

21 – 69 S01 – S05

21 – 69 21 – 69 21 – 69 21 – 69 21 – 69

(S1 – S3) S1 – S20

(M1 – U10)

S21 – S41

(100.5 – 299.5

MHz)

S21 – S41

(299.25 –

467.25 MHz) —

Other Settings

DRIVE

SELECT

Television operation

You can conﬁ gure the remote control TV operation buttons to turn the television on/off, change the television input mode, select the television channel and change the television volume.

DVD/VHS

Turn TV on/off

Input select

DRIVE SELECT

2 54

VOL

TRACKING/V-LOCK/PAGE

−

Volume

Channel select

1 Point the remote control at the

television. While pressing [^ TV], enter the code

with the numbered buttons.

e.g., 01: [0] ➡ [1] 10: [1] ➡ [0]

Manufacturer and Code No.

Brand Code Brand Code

Panasonic 01/02/03/04 METZ 05/28 AIWA 35 MITSUBISHI 05/19/20/47 AKAI 27/30 MIVAR 24 BEJING 33 NEC 36 BEKO 05/71/72/73/74NOBLEX 33

2 Test by turning on the television and

changing channels.

y Repeat the procedure until you ﬁ nd the code that allows

correct operation.

y If your television brand is not listed or if the code listed for

your television does not allow control of your television, this remote control is not compatible with your television.

Note

y If your television brand has more than one code listed, select the

one that allows correct operation.

Child Lock

The Child Lock deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.

Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN] simultaneously until “X HOLD” appears on the unit’s display.

If you press a button while the Child Lock is on, “X HOLD” appears on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.

To cancel the Child Lock

Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN] simultaneously until “X HOLD” disappears.

Changing the unit’s settings/Other Settings

BENQ 58/59 NOKIA 25/26/27/60/

BP 09 NORDMENDE 10 BRANDT 10/15 OLEVIA 45 BUSH 05 ONWA 30/39/70 CENTREX 66 ORION 05 CHANGHONG 69 PEONY 49/69 CURTIS 05 PHILCO 41/48/64 DAEWOO 64/65 PHILIPS 05/06/46 DESMET 05 PHONOLA 05 DUAL 05 PIONEER 37/38 ELEMIS 05 PROVIEW 52 FERGUSON 10/34 PYE 05 FINLUX 61 RADIOLA 05 FISHER 21 SABA 10 FUJITSU 53 SALORA 26 FUNAI 63/67 SAMSUNG 32/42/43/65/

GOLDSTAR 05/50/51 SANSUI 05 GOODMANS 05 SANYO 21/54/55/56 GRADIENTE 36 SCHNEIDER 05/29/30 GRUNDIG 09 SEG 05/69/75/76/

HIKONA 52 SELECO 05/25 HITACHI 05/22/23/40/41SHARP 18

INNO HIT 05 SIEMENS 09 IRRADIO 30 SINUDYNE 05 ITT 25 SONY 08 JINGXING 49 TCL 31/33/66/67/

JVC 17/30/39/70 TELEFUNKEN 10/11/12/

KDS 52 TEVION 52 KOLIN 45 TEX ONDA 52 KONKA 62 THOMSON 10/15/44 LG 05/50/51 TOSHIBA 16/57 LOEWE 07/46 WHITE

MAG 52 YAMAHA 18/41

WESTINGHOUSE

77/78

13/14

RQT9090

Additional connections

AV OUT

AV 1 (TV)

RF IN

RF OUT

OUT

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

R-AUDIO-L

S VIDEO

BPR

AV 2 (EXT)

OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (

PCM/BITSTREAM

)

RF IN

RF OUT

AV 1 (TV)AV 2 (EXT)

AC IN

AV OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (PCM/BITSTREAM)

S VIDEO

VIDEO

RPBY

R-AUDIO-L

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

OUT

VHF/UHF

RF IN

VHF/UHF

RF IN

RF OUT

HDD/DVD output and HDD/DVD/VHS output

The unit has HDD/DVD/VHS common out terminals and HDD/DVD priority out terminals.

HDD/DVD/VHS common out

y For HDD/DVD/VHS common out terminals, both HDD/DVD and VHS signals can be

output, e.g. RGB or composite video.

HDD/DVD priority out

This is the dedicated terminal to enjoy pictures played on HDD/DVD in higher picture quality, e.g. HDMI or component video. y The HDD/DVD priority out terminals can also output the VHS signal.

However this is not possible during HDD/DVD recording or HDD/DVD timer recording.

Connecting a television and VCR

Television’s rear panel

Cooling fan

HDD/DVD/VHS common out

HDD/DVD priority out

To the aerial

Aerial cable

RF coaxial cable

(included)

Connecting a terminal other than the 21-pin Scart terminal (➡ 11, 82)

Fully wired 21-pin Scart cable

AC mains lead

(included) Connect only after all other connections are complete.

To household mains socket

(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)

RF coaxial cable

This unit’s rear panel

Fully wired 21-pin Scart cable

RF coaxial cable

(included)

VCR’s rear panel

Required setting

“AV2 Input” and “AV2 Connection

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

( menu (➡ 76)

Connect the unit directly to the television (➡ 10, )

)” settings in the Setup

RQT9090

Connecting a television and VCR, digital satellite receiver or analogue decoder*

RF IN

RF OUT

AV 1 (TV)AV 2 (EXT)

AC IN

AV OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (PCM/BITSTREAM)

S VIDEO

VIDEO

RPBY

R-AUDIO-L

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

OUT

VHF/UHF

RF IN

VHF/UHF

RF IN

RF OUT

* Information about the Decoder is for Italy, Spain and Switzerland only.

Aerial cable

Television’s rear panel

RF coaxial cable

(included)

Connecting a terminal other than the 21-pin Scart terminal (➡ 11, 82)

Cooling fan

Fully wired 21-pin Scart cable

To the aerial

Additional connections

RF coaxial cable

AC mains lead

(included) Connect only after all other connections are complete.

To household mains socket

(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)

Required setting

“AV2 Input” and “AV2 Connection (

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

Connect the unit directly to the television (➡ 10, )

VCR’s rear panel

)” settings in the Setup menu (➡ 76)

Fully wired 21-pin Scart cable

Digital satellite receiver or analogue decoder’s* rear panel

This unit’s rear panel

RF coaxial cable

(included)

RQT9090

Additional connections

CRT

* Leave “Yellow” unconnected.

Connecting a television with AUDIO/ VIDEO or S VIDEO terminals

The S VIDEO OUT terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the VIDEO OUT terminal. (Actual results depend on the television.)

VIDEO

S VIDEO

AUDIO IN

R L

Red White Yellow Red White

Audio/Video cable

(included)

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

RPBY

Red White Yellow Red White

R-AUDIO-L

S VIDEO

VIDEO

OUT

This unit’s rear panel

Television’s rear panelTelevision’s rear panel

VIDEO

RPBY

VIDEO

OUT

S VIDEO

AUDIO IN

R L

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

R-AUDIO-L

This unit’s rear panel

S Video cable

Connecting a television with COMPONENT VIDEO terminals

Television’s rear panel

COMPONENT

VIDEO IN

Component video cable

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

RPBY

S VIDEO

VIDEO

R-AUDIO-L

Red White

OUT

AV 2 (EXT)

This unit’s rear panel

COMPONENT VIDEO terminals can be used for either interlace or progressive output (➡ 96) and provide a purer picture than the S VIDEO OUT terminal. y Connect to terminals of the same colour.

Required setting

“Progressive” setting in the Setup menu (➡ 75)

If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube)

Progressive output may cause some ﬂ ickering, even if it is progressive compatible. Turn off “Progressive” if you are concerned about it (➡ 66). This is the same for multi-system televisions using PAL mode.

AUDIO IN

R L

Red White

Audio/Video cable

(included)

Connecting an ampliﬁ er with a digital input terminal

y To enjoy multi-channel surround sound DVD-Video, connect an

ampliﬁ er with Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG decoders.

Required setting

“Digital Audio Output” in the Setup menu (➡ 74)

y When this unit is connected to an ampliﬁ er with an optical digital

audio cable and connected to a television with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the disc by setting “Digital Audio Output” to “Optical Only” in the Setup menu (➡ 75). In this case audio is only output from the ampliﬁ er not the television.

y Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable (not included),

check the terminal shape of the connected equipment.

y You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not suited to DVD.

Ampliﬁ er’s rear panel

Optical digital audio cable

Do not bend sharply when connecting.

This unit’s rear panel

OPTICAL IN

V OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

Insert fully with this side up.

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

R-AUDIO-L

OUT

RPBY

S VIDEO

Do not bend cable sharply.

AV 2 (EXT)

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

This unit

Progressive output

Connecting a stereo ampliﬁ er

Ampliﬁ er’s rear panel

AUDI O IN

R L

Red White

Audio cable

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

DO NOT

Red White

R-AUDIO-L

RPBY

VIDEO

OUT

This unit’s rear panel

S VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO IN

RQT9090

Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and receiver

RF IN

RF OUT

AV 1 (TV)AV 2 (EXT)

AV OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

S VIDEO

VIDEO

RPBY

R-AUDIO-L

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

OUT

y Video sources converted to 1920 × 1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,

native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.

y Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover). y When outputting 1080p signal, please use the HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.

Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function

y Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised. y It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.

Recommended part number: RP-CDHG10 (1.0 m), RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG20 (2.0 m), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.

Television’s rear

panel

HDMI cable

HDMI IN

HDMI INHDMI OUT

Receiver’s rear panel

Fully wired 21-pin Scart cable

Connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA)

If the 21-pin Scart cable is connected, the following functions are available.

y Download from the TV (➡ 44) y Direct TV Recording (➡ 44) y Watching pictures from digital satellite

receiver or analogue decoder*

(In this case, make sure to switch the television input to “AV”.)

Additional connections

HDMI AV OUT

Required setting

y Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and

Optical” (➡ 75). (The default setting is “HDMI and Optical”.)

This unit’s rear panel

Note

y If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (➡ 96) and

output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)

y You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.

* Information about the Decoder is for Italy, Spain and Switzerland only.

RQT9090

Frequently asked questions

Refer to the following items if you have any doubts about unit operations.

Set up Page

Which aerial is suitable for receiving digital terrestrial broadcasts?

Can this unit receive or record High Deﬁ nition (HD) broadcasts?

What equipment is necessary to play multi-channel surround sound?

Are the headphones and speakers directly connected to the unit?

The television has a Scart terminal and component video input terminal. Which should I connect with?

Is my television progressive output compatible?

Disc Page

Can I play DVD-Video and Video CDs bought in another country?

Can a DVD-Video that does not have a region number be played?

Please tell me about disc compatibility with this unit.

Please tell me about CD-R and CD-RW compatibility with this unit.

Recording Page

Can I record from a commercially purchased video cassette or DVD?

Can DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVDVideo format), +R, +R DL and +RW recorded on this unit be played on other equipment?

Can a digital audio signal from this unit be recorded to other equipment?

(Analogue broadcast only) Can I switch to bilingual broadcast during recording?

Can I high speed copy to a disc?

y You can use your current aerial. Room rod aerials are also suitable. Use an indoor

antenna if the reception is poor. Consult your local TV aerial installer.

y No, this unit cannot receive or record High Deﬁ nition (HD) broadcasts.

y You cannot playback multi-channel sound on this unit without other equipment. You must

connect this unit with an HDMI cable or an optical digital audio cable to an ampliﬁ er with a built-in (Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG) decoder.

y You cannot directly connect them to the unit. Connect through the ampliﬁ er etc.

y If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube) we recommend using the Scart

terminal. You can enjoy high-quality RGB video from this unit by connecting to an RGB compatible television. If you have an LCD/plasma television or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan, connect through the component video terminals for high-quality progressive video. If you have a CRT television or a multi-system television using PAL mode that is compatible with progressive scan, we cannot recommend progressive output as some ﬂ ickering can occur.

y All Panasonic televisions that have 576 (625)/50i · 50p, 480 (525)/60i · 60p input

terminals are compatible. Consult the manufacturer if you have another brand of television.

y You cannot play DVD-Video if their region number does not include “2” or “ALL”.

Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information.

y The DVD-Video region number indicates the disc conforms to a standard. You cannot

play discs that do not have a region number. You also cannot play discs that do not conform to a standard.

y This unit records and plays DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +RW, and

plays DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format). However you cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit (playback and copy are possible).

y This unit also records and plays high speed recording compatible DVD-R, DVD-R DL,

DVD-RW, +R, +R DL, +RW discs.

y This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been recorded in one of the following

standards: CD-DA, Video CD, SVCD (conforming to IEC62107), DivX, MP3 and still pictures (JPEG).

y You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with this unit.

y Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVD are copy protected; therefore,

recording is usually not possible.

y You can play on compatible equipment such as DVD players after ﬁ nalising the disc on

this unit. However, depending on the condition of the recording, the quality of the disc and capabilities of the DVD player, play may not be possible.

y If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible equipment. y You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording DVD, change the “Digital Audio

Output” settings to the following in the Setup menu. – PCM Down Conversion: On – Dolby Digital/DTS/MPEG: PCM However, only as long as digital recording from the disc is permitted and the recording equipment is compatible with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz.

y You cannot record MP3 signals. y With HDD and DVD-RAM, you can. Just press [AUDIO].

(When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”)

y With DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +RW you cannot. Change before

recording with “Bilingual Audio Selection” in the Setup menu.

y Yes, you can. (When “Rec for High Speed Copy” was set to “On” before recording the

programme.) Depending on the disc type, the maximum speed varies.

—

82, 83

10, 82

—

Cover

—

13, 14

—

14, 16

—

RQT9090

TV Guide Page

Is it possible to programme a recording, with a start and end time that are different from the TV Guide system?

Can I receive TV Guide system data via a connected satellite receiver or a Set Top Box?

How can I cancel a TIMER programming?

What happens when I unplug my unit from the power outlet?

What happens if my postal code changes, e.g. if I move?

USB Page

What can or cannot be done using the USB port on this unit?

Music Page

What will happen if I try to record the same CD multiple times?

Can I transfer the music tracks from HDD to the disc or USB memory?

y You can manually change the start and end time of programmes in the Timer Recording

menu. For the programmes set to “Series Timer Rec.”, you can set the start time earlier and the end time later by some minutes, up to a maximum of 10 minutes.

y No, only via the built-in tuner. To perform timer recordings with satellite receivers or Set

Top Boxes, please use the External Link feature or your unit’s manual timer programming.

y Press [PROG/CHECK] and select the desired entry and then press [DELETE ½].

y The TV Guide data will not be updated. y If the unit is disconnected from the household mains socket for a longer period of time,

the TV Guide data will be lost.

y Clock setting will be erased and timer recording will not work. y Change “Post Code” in the Setup menu. If necessary, perform a full Auto-Setup. Saved

TV Guide data may be lost.

y You can play DivX, MP3 or still picture (JPEG) ﬁ les on a USB memory. y You can copy still pictures (JPEG) ﬁ les on a USB memory to the HDD or DVD-RAM. y You can copy MP3 ﬁ les on a USB memory to the HDD. y You can connect a video equipment and copy SD Video to the HDD or DVD-RAM y Data on the HDD or a disc cannot be transferred to a USB memory. y Data on a USB memory cannot be edited or a USB memory cannot be formatted on this

unit.

y Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit.

y New album will be made following the existing album.

y No, you cannot.

27, 30

— —

—

71, 78

36 62 64 61 — —

—

Frequently asked questions

Language code list Enter the code with the numbered buttons.

Abkhazian: 6566 Afar: 6565 Afrikaans: 6570 Albanian: 8381 Amharic: 6577 Arabic: 6582 Armenian: 7289 Assamese: 6583 Aymara: 6589 Azerbaijani: 6590 Bashkir: 6665 Basque: 6985 Bengali; Bangla: 6678 Bhutani: 6890 Bihari: 6672 Breton: 6682 Bulgarian: 6671 Burmese: 7789 Byelorussian: 6669 Cambodian: 7577

Catalan: 6765 Chinese: 9072 Corsican: 6779 Croatian: 7282 Czech: 6783 Danish: 6865 Dutch: 7876 English: 6978 Esperanto: 6979 Estonian: 6984 Faroese: 7079 Fiji: 7074 Finnish: 7073 French: 7082 Frisian: 7089 Galician: 7176 Georgian: 7565 German: 6869 Greek: 6976 Greenlandic: 7576 Guarani: 7178

Gujarati: 7185 Hausa: 7265 Hebrew: 7387 Hindi: 7273 Hungarian: 7285 Icelandic: 7383 Indonesian: 7378 Interlingua: 7365 Irish: 7165 Italian: 7384 Japanese: 7465 Javanese: 7487 Kannada: 7578 Kashmiri: 7583 Kazakh: 7575 Kirghiz: 7589 Korean: 7579 Kurdish: 7585 Laotian: 7679 Latin: 7665 Latvian, Lettish: 7686

Lingala: 7678 Lithuanian: 7684 Macedonian: 7775 Malagasy: 7771 Malay: 7783 Malayalam: 7776 Maltese: 7784 Maori: 7773 Marathi: 7782 Moldavian: 7779 Mongolian: 7778 Nauru: 7865 Nepali: 7869 Norwegian: 7879 Oriya: 7982 Pashto, Pushto: 8083 Persian: 7065 Polish: 8076 Portuguese: 8084 Punjabi: 8065 Quechua: 8185

Rhaeto-Romance: 8277 Romanian: 8279 Russian: 8285 Samoan: 8377 Sanskrit: 8365 Scots Gaelic: 7168 Serbian: 8382 Serbo-Croatian: 8372 Shona: 8378 Sindhi: 8368 Singhalese: 8373 Slovak: 8375 Slovenian: 8376 Somali: 8379 Spanish: 6983 Sundanese: 8385 Swahili: 8387 Swedish: 8386 Tagalog: 8476 Tajik: 8471

Tamil: 8465 Tatar: 8484 Telugu: 8469 Thai: 8472 Tibetan: 6679 Tigrinya: 8473 Tonga: 8479 Turkish: 8482 Turkmen: 8475 Twi: 8487 Ukrainian: 8575 Urdu: 8582 Uzbek: 8590 Vietnamese: 8673 Volapük: 8679 Welsh: 6789 Wolof: 8779 Xhosa: 8872 Yiddish: 7473 Yoruba: 8979 Zulu: 9085

RQT9090

Messages

On the television Page

Authorisation Error.

Cannot ﬁ nish recording completely.

Cannot playback. TV system is different from the setting. To playback, please change the TV System in Setup.

Cannot record to the disc.

Unable to format.

Cannot play on this unit.

Cannot record. Disc is full.

Cannot record. Maximum number of titles exceeded.

No cassette.

No Disc

No folders.

No SD CARD No valid SD card.

Not enough space in the copy destination.

Now recording on DVD/HDD. To watch pictures on VHS, use AV1 socket, and switch to an appropriate AV channel on your TV.

The cassette is write-protected.

This is a non-recordable disc.

This disc is not formatted properly. Format it using DVD Management in FUNCTION MENU.

Not enough space on HDD. Space of 4 hours (in SP mode) is necessary.

Maximum number of titles is recorded on HDD. Please delete unwanted titles.

Rental Expired.

y You are trying to play the DivX VOD content that was purchased with a different

registration code. You cannot play the content on this unit. (DivX)

y The programme was copy-protected. y The HDD or disc may be full. y The maximum number of programme has been exceeded.

y You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV

system currently selected on the unit. Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit.

y The disc may be dirty or scratched.

y You tried to play a non-compatible image. y Turn the unit off and re-insert the card.

HDD RAM -RW(V) +RW

delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL there is no increase in disc space. Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW increases only when the last recorded title is deleted.]

y Use a new disc.

y There is no video cassette in the tape deck when playing or recording TV programmes.

Insert a video cassette.

y The disc may be upside down.

y There is no compatible folder in this unit.

y The card is not inserted. If this message is displayed with a compatible card already

inserted, turn off the unit, remove and then re-insert the card.

y The card inserted is not compatible or the card format does not match.

y Create space by deleting any unnecessary items.

y Delete one or more items registered on the copying list to ensure that the “Destination

Capacity” is not exceeded.

y The VHS plays back while recording on HDD or DVD. You can watch the VHS playback

by connecting 21-pin Scart cable from AV1 on the unit to the television. VHS cannot be output via “HDD/DVD Priority OUT” while recording to HDD or DVD.

y A video cassette without a secure accidental erasure prevention tab is inserted when

recording programmes. Use a video cassette with a secure accidental erasure prevention tab.

y The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert a DVD-RAM or unﬁ nalised

DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R or +RW.

y You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW. y You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit. Record to the

HDD and then copy to the disc.

-R DL +R DL

or when the total number of the recorded titles on the HDD and the titles to be copied are greater than 499. Delete unwanted titles from the HDD.

y The DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays. You cannot play it. (DivX)

y The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc.

It is not possible to copy when there is not enough free space on the HDD

Create space by deleting any unnecessary titles. [Even if you

— — 24

16 17

22, 47,

—

22, 47,

51, 69

59, 63,

69 —

—

RQT9090

On the unit’s display

The following messages or service numbers appear on the unit’s display when something unusual is detected during startup and use.

DVD 

(“” stands for a number.)

y The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote control.

Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time for more than 5 seconds.

Page

GUIDE

HARD ERR*

NoCASSETTE*

NoERAS

NoREAD

NoWRIT

PLEASE WAIT*

PROG FULL*

PROTECT*

REMOVE

SP 35:50 LP 151h

“SP”, “LP” and the numbers are examples.

SW-DL

UNFORMAT*

UNSUPPORT*

F74

F75

U50

For Germany

U59

U61

U76

U80 U81 U99

U88

H or F y There is something unusual. (The service number displayed after H and F depends on the unit’s

X HOLD

* The message is alternately displayed.

y TV Guide data is being downloaded.

y If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.

y You have not inserted a video cassette for the recording.

y You cannot delete items on this disc.

The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.

y The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit. y This message may appear when the DVD lens cleaner has ﬁ nished cleaning.

Press [; OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc.

y You cannot write to this disc.

The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.

y There was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is carrying

out its recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not broken. Wait until the message disappears.

y There are already 32 timer programmes. Delete unnecessary timer programmes.

y You have inserted a video cassette without the accidental erasure prevention tab. Use a video cassette

with an accidental erasure prevention tab.

y The USB device is drawing too much power. Remove the USB device.

y Available space on the HDD or disc.

The example “SP 35:50” is displayed when less than 100 hours are available and the example “LP 151h” is displayed when over 100 hours are available. “SP” and “LP” are recording modes, “35:50” means “35 hours 50 minutes” and “151h” means “151 hours”.

y The unit is performing a software update.

y You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL or DVD-RW

(DVD-Video format) that has been recorded on other equipment. Format the disc to use it. However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted.

y You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on. y You tried to operate with a non-compatible USB memory.

y The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to a transfer malfunction.

Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.

y The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to an internal data malfunction.

Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.

y A short circuit was detected in the aerial input. Please check your aerial.

y The unit is hot.

The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message disappears. Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the rear of the unit.

y (When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred during recording, playback or

copy to VHS etc. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again.

y HDMI cannot be output because you are connected to a model that does not support copyright

protection.

y The unit fails to operate properly. Press [8] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby mode. Now

press [8] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.

y (When a disc is inserted) Displays when there was something unusual detected with the disc while

recording, playback or copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again.

condition.)

y Check the unit using the troubleshooting guide. If the service number does not disappear, do the

following.

1. Disconnect the plug from the household mains socket, wait a few seconds, then reconnect it.

2. Press [8] to turn the power on. (The unit may be ﬁ xed.) If the service number does not disappear despite after doing the above, request service from the dealer. Inform the dealer of the service number when requesting service.

y The Child Lock function is activated.

Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN] at the same time until “X HOLD” disappears.

—

7 7

—

13, 14

—

88–94

Messages

RQT9090

Troubleshooting guide

Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions indicated in the chart do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.

The following do not indicate a problem with this unit:

y Regular disc/video cassette rotating sounds. y Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions. y Image disturbance during search. y Interruptions in reception due to periodic satellite broadcasting

breaks.

y Operations are slow to respond in power save mode. y Operations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again using a

Panasonic disc.)

Power Page

No power. The unit does not turn on pressing [^ DVD/VHS].

The unit switches to standby mode.

The power is turned off automatically.

Displays Page

The display is dim.

“0:00” is ﬂ ashing on the unit’s display.

The time recorded on the disc and the available time shown do not add up. The displayed time of this unit is different from the actual recording time or MP3 recording time.

The clock is not correct.

Compared to the actual recorded time, the elapsed time displayed is less. (Only when recording in NTSC)

The tape counter is not changing.

y Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active household mains socket. y Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in recording standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s

display blinks when [^ DVD/VHS] is pressed). Press [EXT LINK] to cancel the recording standby.

y One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [8] on the main unit to turn the unit on.

y If you connected this unit to an “HDAVI Control” compatible TV with an HDMI cable, or

connected this unit to a Q Link-compatible TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable, this unit will be automatically set to standby mode when the TV is set to standby mode.

y Change “FL Display” in the Setup menu. y Set the clock.

y Times shown may disagree with actual times. y Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW increases only when the

last recorded title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted.

y Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL, there is no

increase in disc space.

y More disc space than the actual recording time is used after recording or editing the DVD-R,

DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL 200 times or more.

y While searching, the elapsed time may not display correctly. y Under adverse reception conditions, etc., the automatic time correction function may not

work. In this case, “Automatic” is automatically turned to “Off”. If re-setting the Auto Clock Setting does not work, set the time manually.

y The displayed recording/play time is converted from the number of frames at 29.97 frames

(equal to 0.999 seconds) to one second. There will be a slight difference between the time displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual one-hour elapsed time may display as approximately 59 minutes 56 seconds). This does not affect the recording.

y The tape counter does not change while playing unrecorded parts. The “second” display

changes as follows:

(e.g., Blank after 1 h 36 min)

y The unit freezes due to one of its safety devices being

activated. (Press and hold [8] on the main unit for 10 seconds.)

y When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected

sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.

10, 80, 81

—

— —

—

RQT9090

y The unit’s display also appears like this if the tape is dirty or damaged.

Consult your dealer if this is the case.

“U88” is displayed and the disc cannot be ejected.

TV screen and video Page

Television reception worsens after connecting the unit.

The digital channel information or control panel does not appear.

The grey background does not appear.

Picture does not appear during timer recording.

The 4:3 aspect ratio picture expands left and right. Screen size is wrong.

The screen changes automatically.

y The unit is carrying out the recovery process. Do the following to eject the disc. 1 Press [8] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.

If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [8] on the main unit for about 10 seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.

2 While the unit is off, press and hold [g] and [CH 1] on the main unit at the same time for

about 5 seconds. Remove the disc.

y This can occur because the signals are being divided between the unit and other equipment.

It can be solved by using a signal booster, available from audio-visual suppliers. If it is not solved by using a signal booster, consult the dealer.

y Select the length of time (3–10 sec.) that the “On-Screen Messages” in the Setup menu will

be displayed.

y The digital channel information will not appear during playback or recording. y Analogue broadcasts do not support the digital channel information. y The control panel is only displayed when connected to a TV with “HDAVI Control 2” or

“HDAVI Control 3” function.

y Select “On” in “Grey Background” in the Setup menu.

y Timer recordings work regardless whether the unit is on or off. To conﬁ rm the timer recording

is going to work properly, turn the unit on.

y Use the television to change the aspect. If your television does not have that function, set

“Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”.

y Check the settings for “TV Aspect” in the Setup menu. y If you connect an HDMI cable, set “Aspect for 4:3 Video” to “16:9” in the Setup menu. y Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On”, and set the “Aspect for Recording” to “4:3”.

It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your television’s operating instructions.

y The display may turn to the screen saver mode automatically if there is no operation for 5

minutes or more. Press [OK] to return to the previous screen.

—

— —

—

75 75 73

—

TV screen and video (continued) Page

The recorded title is stretched vertically.

There is a lot of after-image when playing video.

When playing DVD-Video using progressive output, one part of the picture momentarily appears to be doubled up.

There is no apparent change in picture quality when adjusted with the Picture menu in the onscreen menus.

The images from this unit do not appear on the television.

Picture is distorted.

The picture is distorted during play, or video will not play correctly.

Sound Page

No sound. Low volume. Distorted sound. Cannot hear the desired audio type.

Cannot switch audio.

y 16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the following cases.

-R -R DL -RW(V)

–

longer) recording mode. – If you recorded or copied to a +R, +R DL or +RW. – If you recorded with the “Aspect for Recording” set to “4:3” in the Setup menu.

When you want to record 16:9 programme in the same aspect, set “Rec for High Speed

Copy” to “On”, and set the “Aspect for Recording” to “16:9”. It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your television’s operating instructions.

y Set “Playback NR” in the Picture menu to “Off ”.

y Set “Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”. This problem is caused by the editing method

or material used on DVD-Video, but should be corrected if you use interlace output.

y The effect is less perceivable with some types of video.

y Make sure that the television is connected to the AV1 terminal, VIDEO OUT terminal,

S VIDEO OUT terminal, COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals or HDMI terminal on this unit.

y Make sure that the television’s input setting (e.g., AV 1) is correct. y Progressive output is set to on but the connected television is not progressive compatible.

Press and hold [g] and [q] (PLAY) on the main unit at the same time for more than 5 seconds to cancel this setting. The setting will change to interlace.

y The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system used by the disc now playing. While

stopped, keep pressing [g] and [; OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for 5 or more seconds. The system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa.

y When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc that matches with this unit’s TV

system.

y Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables.

Reduce the number of connected devices.

y You may be playing a TV programme recorded with poor reception or unfavorable weather

conditions.

y The picture may be distorted or a black screen may appear brieﬂ y between recorded titles in

the following situations: – between titles recorded with different recording modes. – between scenes recorded with different aspect ratios. – between scenes recorded with different resolutions. – between playlist chapters.

y Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output” settings. Check the input mode on the

ampliﬁ er if you have connected one.

y Press [AUDIO] to select the audio. y Turn off V.S.S. in the following cases.

– When using discs that do not have surround sound effects such as Karaoke discs. – When playing bilingual broadcast programmes.

y Audio may not be output due to how ﬁ les were created. (DivX) y Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables. Reduce

the number of connected devices.

y The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is output from the HDMI AV OUT

terminal or the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.

y To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI cable, set “Digital Audio Output” to

“HDMI and Optical” in the Setup menu.

y Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be distorted if this unit is connected

with an HDMI cable.

y If recording to the HDD or a DVD-RAM when “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, you

can only record either the main or secondary audio of a bilingual broadcast. If you do not intend to copy the title to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW set “Rec for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu to “Off ”.

y You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.

– When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the

disc tray while DVD drive is selected. – When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM”. – When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”. (The default setting is “On”.)

y The ampliﬁ er is connected using an optical digital audio cable or an HDMI cable. You cannot

switch the audio if “Dolby Digital” is set to “Bitstream”. Set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” or connect using audio cables.

y There are discs for which audio cannot be changed because of how the disc was created.

If you recorded or copied using “EP” or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or

—

10, 11,

80–83

— —

—

10, 11, 74,

80–83 34, 41

— —

—

74 73

74, 82

—

Troubleshooting guide

RQT9090

Troubleshooting guide

Operation Page

Cannot operate the television. The remote control doesn’t work.

y Change the manufacturer code. Some televisions cannot be operated even if you change the

code.

y The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote

control.

Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time for more than 5 seconds.

The unit is on but cannot be operated.

Cannot eject disc.

Cannot tune channels. Cannot download channel presets from the television.

Startup is slow.

y The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones.

y You are not pointing the remote control at the main unit’s remote control signal sensor during

operation.

y Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission.

y Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that may be subject to sunlight

exposure.

y It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again after changing the batteries.

y It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after changing the batteries.

y The Child Lock function is activated.

y Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected properly.

y Some operations may be prohibited by the disc.

y The unit is hot (“U59” appears on the display). Wait for “U59” to disappear.

y One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.

Reset the unit as follows: 1 Press [8] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.

If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [8] on the main unit for about 10 seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby. Alternatively, disconnect the AC mains lead, wait one minute, then reconnect it.

2 Press [8] on the main unit to switch it on. If the unit still cannot be operated, consult the

dealer.

y The unit is recording.

y Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in recording standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s

display blinks when [^ DVD/VHS] is pressed). Press [EXT LINK] to cancel the recording standby.

y The unit may have a problem. While the unit is off, press and hold [g] and [CH 1] on the

main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. Remove the disc and consult the dealer. If the Child Lock function is activated, above operation does not work. Cancel the Child Lock function.

y Check the connections.

y You must connect to a television equipped with the Q Link function with a fully wired 21-pin

Scart cable to download channel presets.

y Make sure that “Quick Start” is set to “On”.

y Startup takes time in the following situations:

– A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted. – The clock is not set. – Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is connected. – When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.

5 5

— —

77 79 79

19, 20

— — —

— 27

10, 80, 81

—

78 —

RQT9090

Recording, timer recording and copying Page

Cannot record. Cannot copy.

y You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be recorded on. Insert a disc the

unit can record onto.

y The disc is unformatted. Format the disc.

RAM -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

y The write-protect tab on the cartridge is set to PROTECT, or the disc is protected with DVD

69 68

Management.

y Some programmes have limitations on the number of times they can be recorded (CPRM). y You cannot record when there is not enough space or when the number of titles has reached

its limit. Delete unwanted titles or use a new disc.

y You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit.

22, 47,

—

Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.

-R DL +R DL

In the following situations, you cannot copy. Delete unnecessary titles from the

HDD and then copy.

22, 47,

– If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will copy titles from the HDD to a

blank disc and ﬁ ll the entire disc, HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP mode

recording is necessary.) – If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be copied has exceeded 499

y You cannot record and copy on ﬁ nalised discs. However, you can record and copy again if

—

you format DVD-RW.

y Due to peculiarities of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and

—

+RW you may be unable to record onto them if you either insert and remove the disc or switch the unit on and off while a disc is loaded, a total of ﬁ fty times.

y DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW recorded on this unit

—

may not be recordable on other Panasonic DVD Recorders.

y This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL signal recordings.

—

(However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.) Play of discs recorded with both PAL and NTSC on another unit is not guaranteed.

—

28, 80, 81

—

Cannot record from external equipment.

Timer recording does not work properly.

y Some broadcasts are copyright protected. y Check that the connection is correct.

y Select the input channel (“AV2”, “AV3” or “DV”) for the equipment you have connected. y The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme times overlap. Correct the

programme.

y The programme is not in timer recording standby. (The timer icon “z” in the timer recording

list is not on.)

y Set the clock. y The programme information in the TV Guide system may not be correct. It is recommended

77 30

to modify the start and end times to allow a margin of a few minutes.

Timer recording does not stop even when [g] is pressed.

y Make sure that the recording drive is selected. Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the

recording drive.

y When using the linked timer recording with external equipment, press [EXT LINK]. (“EXT-L”

disappears.)

y If you start recording immediately after turning on the unit while “Quick Start” is set to “On”,

—

you cannot then stop recording for a few seconds.

A part or whole of a recorded title has been lost.

y If there is a power failure or the plug is disconnected from the household mains socket while

recording or editing, the title may be lost or the HDD/disc may become unusable. You will have to format the disc (

HDD RAM -RW(V) +RW

) or use a new disc. We cannot offer

—

any guarantee regarding lost programmes or discs.

The programme name and the recorded title do not match.

Cannot copy to a DVD-R, etc. disc using the high speed mode.

y There was a programme change after timer recording was set but the recorded title still has

the old programme name.

y When recording to the HDD, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” in the Setup menu. (The

default setting is “On”.)

y In the following cases, high speed mode does not work, even if the titles were recorded with

—

“Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “On”.

+R +R DL +RW

–

+R +R DL +RW

–

-R -R DL -RW(V)

–

If recorded in “EP” or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode. If recorded in 16:9 aspect.

If recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or

longer) mode.

+R +R DL +RW

Titles recorded on other Panasonic DVD recorders with “Rec for High Speed

—

Copy” set to “On”, and then copied to the HDD on this unit may not copy to +R, +R DL or +RW discs with high-speed copy.

When copying, it takes a long time even when high speed mode is selected.

y Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording. Even if the disc is high speed

recording compatible, the maximum speed may not be possible due to the condition of the disc.

y It takes longer than normal to copy many titles. y You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6 hours when using other Panasonic

—

— —

DVD Recorders that are not compatible with EP (8 Hours) mode recording.

An unusually loud sound is coming from the rotating DVD-R, etc.

The DV automatic recording function does not work.

y When recording or high speed copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video

format), +R, +R DL and +RW the sound of the disc rotating may be louder than normal, however, this is not a problem.

y If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted, check the connections and DV

equipment settings.

y You cannot start recording until the images from the DV equipment appear on the television. y Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes on the tape in the DV

—

— —

equipment are not successive.

y Depending on the equipment, the DV automatic recording may not operate properly. y The audio/video recordings are recorded on other than a DV tape.

—

Troubleshooting guide

RQT9090

Troubleshooting guide

Play Page

Play fails to start even when [q] (PLAY) is pressed. Play starts but then stops immediately.

Audio and video momentarily pause.

DVD-Video is not played.

Alternative soundtrack and subtitles cannot be selected.

No subtitles.

Angle cannot be changed.

You have forgotten your ratings password. You want to cancel the ratings level.

Quick View does not work.

The resume play function does not work.

The Video CD picture does not display properly.

Time Slip, Manual Skip, etc. does not work.

It takes time before play starts.

Picture stops.

Cannot see the beginning of the title played.

Edit Page

Available disc space does not increase even after deleting a title.

Cannot edit.

Cannot format.

Cannot create chapters. Cannot mark the start point or the end point during “Partial Delete” operation.

Cannot delete chapters.

Cannot create a playlist.

Music Page

Tracks could not be copied to the HDD.

ID3 tag of an MP3 ﬁ le is not completely displayed.

y Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up.

y The disc is dirty.

y You tried to play a blank disc or disc unplayable on this unit.

y You tried to play a +RW that needs to be ﬁ nalised on the equipment used for recording.

y You may be able to copy a “One time only recording” title that was recorded to DVD-RAM

using a different Panasonic DVD Recorder to this unit’s HDD, but play is not possible due to copyright protection.

y When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP (8 Hours)” mode, play may not be possible on DVD

players that are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this case use “EP (6 Hours)” mode.

y You cannot play discs during DV automatic recording.

y If playing DivX VOD content, refer to the homepage where you purchased it. (DivX)

y Make sure that the TV is turned on. If the menu or messages are displayed, follow the on-

screen instructions.

y This occurs between playlist chapters.

y This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles on ﬁ nalised DVD-R, DVD-R

DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW that have been copied using the high speed mode.

y This occurs as scenes change during Quick View.

-R DL +R DL

between layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme. However, video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers.

y You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Change this setting.

y Ensure disc is for the correct DVD-Video region number, and is not defective.

y The languages are not recorded on the disc.

y You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change the soundtrack and subtitles on

some discs. Use the disc’s menus to make changes.

y Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.

y Turn the subtitles on. Set “Subtitle” on the on-screen menu to “On”.

y Angles can only be changed during scenes where different angles are recorded.

y The ratings level returns to the factory preset. While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE

SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then press and hold [* REC] and [q] (PLAY) on the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds (“INIT” will appear on the unit’s display).

y This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital.

y This does not work when recording is in XP or FR mode.

y Memorized positions are cancelled when

– press [g] several times. – open the disc tray.

SD CD VCD USB

– – if a recording or timer recording was executed.

y When connecting to Multi-system TV, select “NTSC” in “TV System” in the Setup menu.

y When connecting to PAL TV, the lower part of the picture cannot be displayed correctly

during search.

y These functions do not work with ﬁ nalised discs.

y Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System” settings are different from the title

recorded on the disc.

y This is normal on DivX video. (DivX)

y Picture may stop if the DivX ﬁ les are greater than 2 GB. (DivX)

y (If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an HDMI cable)

When [q] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control, you may not be able to see the beginning of the title played until the picture is displayed on the TV. Using [u], return to the beginning of the title.

y Available disc space does not increase after deleting on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL.

y Disc space increases only when the last recorded title is deleted on DVD-RW (DVD-Video

format) and +RW. The disc space does not increase when any other titles are deleted.

y You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available space.

Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space.

y The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.

y You tried formatting a disc that you may not be able to use in this unit.

y The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when you turn it off or remove the

disc. The information is not written if there is an interruption to the power before this.

y These operations are not possible with still pictures.

y You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You cannot set an end point before a

start point.

y When the chapter is too short to delete, use “Combine Chapters” to make the chapter longer.

y You cannot select all the chapters at once in a title if the title also includes still pictures.

Select them individually.

y If there are copyright protected tracks such as SCMS restrictions, they will not be copied.

y Recording from CDs that do not conform to CD-DA speciﬁ cations (copy control CDs, etc.)

cannot be guaranteed.

y Bonus tracks may not be copied.

y Only the track name and artist name can be displayed with this unit.

When playing a title recorded on both layers, the unit automatically switches

turn off the power.

13, 14

— —

—

— —

—

Cover

—

— —

—

13, 14

—

— —

—

— —

—

Still pictures Page

Cannot display Direct Navigator screen.

Cannot edit or format a card.

The contents of the card cannot be read.

Copying, deleting and setting protection takes a long time.

VHS Picture Page

On-screen display indicators do not appear.

The grey background appears during playback.

VHS Sound Page

Cannot hear the desired audio type.

There is noise when playing a video tape.

VHS Play Page

The playback screen ﬂ ickers.

VHS Recording Page

“” ﬂ ashes when I try to start recording. Cannot record.

USB Page

The contents of the USB memory cannot be read.

TV Guide Page

The TV Guide System does not receive any data.

“No Data” is displayed for some or all stations.

The TV Guide information is not displayed properly.

The TV Guide data transfer was interrupted.

The TV Guide data is not updated.

y This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy or while the unit is standing by for

linked timer recording with external equipment.

y Release the card’s protection setting. (With some cards, the “Write Protection Off” message

sometimes appears on the screen even when protection has been set.)

y Remove the card from the slot and then insert again. If this does not solve the problem, turn

off and turn on the unit again.

y The card format is not compatible with the unit. (The contents on the card may be damaged.)

This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card Speciﬁ cations FAT12 and FAT16 formats, as well as SDHC Memory Cards in FAT32 format.

y The card contains a folder structure and/or ﬁ le extensions that are not compatible with this

unit.

y You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB and SDHC Memory

Cards with capacities from 4 GB to 16 GB.

y This unit cannot play AVCHD format motion pictures or MPEG4 on an SD card. y When there are a lot of folders and ﬁ les, it may sometimes take a few hours.

y When repeating copying or deleting, it may sometimes take a long time. Format the disc or

card.

y Select a setting other than “Off” in “On-Screen Messages” in the Setup Menu.

– Press [STATUS – The on-screen indicator for video cassette playback will not be displayed when this unit is

connected to the TV with the HDD/DVD PRIORITY output terminals.

y You are playing a blank or poor quality portion of the tape. y You can damage the unit if you play dirty or damaged tapes and this can cause the grey

background to appear.

y Press [AUDIO] to select the audio.

y Adjust the tracking. y The tape is old or damaged.

y The video head is dirty. y The tape is old or damaged. y Check the “SQPB” setting.

y A video cassette is not inserted. Insert a video cassette with an accidental erasure

prevention tab.

y The accidental erasure prevention tab has been removed. Cover the hole with adhesive tape.

y Remove the USB memory from the USB port and then inser t again. If this does not solve the

problem, turn off and turn on the unit again.

y Check that the USB memory is inserted correctly. y The format of the USB memory or of its contents is not compatible with the unit. (The

contents on the USB memory may be damaged.)

y The USB memory contains a folder structure and/or ﬁ le extensions that are not compatible

with this unit.

y Turn off and then turn on the unit again. y USB memories connected using a USB extension cable or a USB hub may not be

recognized by this unit.

y Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. y If inserted during playback, recording or copying etc., the USB memory may not be

recognized by this unit.

y Check whether the clock is properly set. y If signal quality is bad (ghost images or limited reception), the TV Guide system may not be

able to receive any data.

y In the area where GUIDE Plus+ system is available, check whether correct post code is

entered.

y Some stations are not supported by the TV Guide system. y Analogue broadcasts are not supported by the TV Guide system. y Programme the Timer recording manually or via S

y There was a programme change.

Check the current programme, e.g. on the Web site for the TV Guide system provider or station provider.

y Programme information about analogue broadcasts is not displayed. y The TV Guide system shows the data that was received up to the interruption.

y The programme information may be incomplete. y The unit must be in standby mode in order to update the data. If the unit is in EXT LINK

mode (EXT-L lights up in the display), then the data update may also not work.

y Make sure that the time is set correctly. y Check whether “Off” is set under “TV Guide Download in Standby” and change the setting in

the Setup menu.

] to show the on-screen display indicators.

HOWVIEW.

—

15, 16

—

— —

—

15, 16

— —

—

— —

—

— —

—

77 78

Troubleshooting guide

RQT9090

Troubleshooting guide

Digital broadcast Page

Digital broadcasts cannot be received.

After DVB Auto-Setup only some or no DVB channels are found.

Picture regularly breaks up on some channels. “No Signal” message is displayed.

Picture very infrequently breaks up on some or all channels.

VIERA Link Page

VIERA Link doesn’t work.

The operation on this unit (music playback etc.) is interrupted.

To reset this unit Page

To return all the settings other than the main ones to the factory preset

To reset the ratings level settings

To restore the unit if it freezes due to one of the safety devices being activated

Other Page

After performing an update, you can no longer receive broadcasts.

y Digital broadcast may not have started in your region yet.

y The aerial may not be pointing in the direction of the TV station, or the direction of the aerial

may have changed due to strong winds or vibration. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.

For Germany

antenna.

y Check to ensure your area is covered by DVB transmissions.

y Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for DVB.

However, use the included RF coaxial cable shown in STEP 1, Connections “A” or “B”. If you live within 5-10 km of DVB transmission towers, a combined VHF/UHF aerial should be adequate. Outside this area, separate VHF and UHF aerials provide superior reception performance.

y Check “Signal Condition”. If “Signal Quality” or “Signal Strength” are displayed in red or

constantly changing, check aerial. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.

y Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for DVB.

Use the included RF coaxial cable shown in STEP 1, Connections “A” or “B”.

y Interference (known as impulse noise) from household appliances such as light switches,

fridges etc. may cause picture break up and/or audio distortion. Use a high quality quad shielded coaxial cable ﬂ y lead between this unit and antenna wall socket to minimise impulse noise pickup. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.

y When “No Signal” message is displayed, check aerial connection.

y Adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning” in the Setup menu.

y Electrical atmospheric interference caused by local or distant lighting storms or heavy rain

with wind in “leafy” locations may cause pictures to break up and audio to mute or distort momentarily.

y Impulse noise interference from an infrequently used electrical appliance, or a passing

vehicle or lawn mower with a “noisy” ignition system.

y Check the HDMI cable connection. Check that “HDMI” is displayed on the front display when

the power for the main unit is set to On.

y Make sure that “VIERA Link” is set to “On”.

y Check the “HDAVI Control” settings on the connected device.

y Some functions may not work if depending on the version of “HDAVI Control” of the

connected equipment. This unit supports “HDAVI Control 3” functions.

y If the connection for the equipment connected with HDMI was changed, or if there was a

power failure or the plug was removed from the household mains socket, “HDAVI Control” may not work. In this case, perform the following operations. 1 When the HDMI cable is connected to all equipment with the power on, turn the TV

(VIERA) on again.

2 Change the TV (VIERA) settings for the “HDAVI Control” function to off, and then set to on

again. (For more information, see the VIERA operating instructions.)

3 Switch the VIERA input to HDMI connection with this unit, and after this unit’s screen is

displayed check that “HDAVI Control” is working.

y The operation on this unit may be interrupted when you press buttons on the TV remote

control that do not work for VIERA Link functions.

y Select “Yes” in “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu. All the settings except for the ratings

level, ratings password and clock settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.

y Select “Yes” in “Default Settings” in the Setup menu. All the settings other than the tuning

settings, clock settings, country settings ( disc language settings, ratings level, ratings password, remote control code, return to the factory presets.

y Press and hold [2 CH] and [CH 1] on the main unit until the country setting screen or the

DVB Auto-Setup screen appears. All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and clock settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.

y While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then press and

hold [* REC] and [q] (PLAY) on the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.

y Press and hold [8] on the main unit for 10 seconds. (The settings remain.)

y Depending on the content of the update, some settings may have returned to the preset

values. Fix the settings again.

Switch “Active Antenna” to “On” in the Setup menu if you are using an indoor

For Italy, Spain and Switzerland

), language settings,

— —

—

— —

—

RQT9090

Speciﬁ cations

Recording system DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format

DVD-R : DVD-Video format

DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format

DVD-RW : DVD-Video format

+R DL (Double Layer)

+RW

Recordable discs

DVD-RAM: 2X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),

2-3X SPEED (Ver. 2.1), 2-5X SPEED (Ver. 2.2)

DVD-R: 1X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-4X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),

1-8X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-16X SPEED (Ver. 2.1) DVD-R DL: 2-4X SPEED (Ver. 3.0), 2-8X SPEED (Ver. 3.0) DVD-RW: 1X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1-2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),

2-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2-6X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)

+R: 2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),

2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2.4-16X SPEED (Ver. 1.3) +R DL: 2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.1) +RW: 2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)

Recording time Maximum 8 hours (using 4.7 GB disc)

XP: Approx. 1 hour, SP: Approx. 2 hours

LP: Approx. 4 hours, EP: Approx. 6 hours/8 hours

Maximum Approx. 441 hours with 250 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)

XP: Approx. 55 hours, SP: Approx. 110 hours

LP: Approx. 221 hours, EP: Approx. 331 hours/441 hours

Playable discs

DVD-R : DVD-Video format, MP3*

DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format

, JPEG*1, DivX*

DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format, MP3*1, JPEG*1, DivX*

DVD-RW : DVD-Video format, DVD Video Recording format

+R, +R DL (Double Layer), +RW

DVD-Video, CD-Audio (CD-DA), Video CD, SVCD*

CD-R/CD-RW : CD-DA*1, Video CD*1, SVCD*1*2, MP3*1, JPEG*1,

DivX*

Internal HDD capacity 250 GB

Optical pick-up System with 1 lens, 2 integration units

(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)

LASER speciﬁ cation

Class 1 LASER Product (Pickup)

Wave length:

CD 780 nm wave length DVD 662 nm wave length

Laser power:

No hazardous radiation is emitted with the safety protection

Audio

Recording system: Dolby Digital 2ch, Linear PCM (XP mode) Audio in: AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (pin jack) Input level: Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz Input impedance: More than 10 kΩ Audio out: AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin jack) Output level: Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz Output impedance: Less than 1 kΩ Digital audio out: Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)

HDMI Output 19 pin type A: 1 pc

HDMITM (V.1.3 with Deep Colour)

y This unit supports “HDAVI Control 3” function.

Video

Video system:

SECAM (only input)/PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 ﬁ elds

NTSC colour signal, 525 lines, 60 ﬁ elds Recording system: MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR) Video in (PAL/SECAM/NTSC):

AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination

S-Video in (PAL/SECAM/NTSC):

AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination RGB in (PAL): AV2 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 Ω, termination Video out (PAL/NTSC):

AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination

S-Video out (PAL/NTSC):

AV1 (21 pin), S-Video Out (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination

RGB out (PAL/NTSC):

AV1 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 Ω, termination

Component video output (NTSC 480p/480i, PAL 576p/576i)

Y: 1.0 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination

: 0.7 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination

PR: 0.7 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination

VHS

Recording format:

VHS Video Cassette System Standard with FM audio

Heads: 4 Helical Scan Heads for Video

2 Helical Scan Heads for FM audio 1 Fixed Head for Normal audio

Tape speed/Recording time (with E-240 tape):

PAL: SP: 23.39 mm/s, 240 min LP: 11.7 mm/s, 480 min EP: 7.8 mm/s, 720 min NTSC: SP: 33.35 mm/s, 168 min EP: 11.12 mm/s, 505 min

Television system

Tuner system Channel coverage

PAL-BGH SECAM-BG (CCIR)

VHF: E2–E12, A–H2 (Italy) UHF: 21–69 CATV: S01–S05 (S1–S3), S1–S20 (M1–U10), S21–S41

SECAM-LL’ (France)

VHF: 2–10 UHF: 21–69 CATV: B–Q (100.5 to 299.5 MHz), S21–S41 (299.25 to 467.25 MHz)

DVB-T (Germany)

DVB-T (France)

DVB-T (Italy)

DVB-T (Spain/

VHF: 5–12 UHF: 21–69

VHF: 5–10 UHF: 21–69

VHF: D–H2 UHF: 21–69

VHF: 5–12 UHF: 21–69

Troubleshooting guide/Speciﬁ cations

Switzerland)

RF converter output: Not provided

SD Card

Slot: SD Memory Card slot: 1 pc

Compatible media: SD Memory Card*

, SDHC Memory Card,

MultiMediaCard

Format: FAT12, FAT16*

(In case of SD Memory Card/MultiMediaCard)

FAT32*4 (In case of SDHC Memory Card)

Still picture (JPEG)

Image ﬁ le format:

JPEG conforming DCF (Design rule for Camera File system),

Number of pixels: Between 34 × 34 and 6144 × 4096

sub sampling; 4:2:2 or 4:2:0

Thawing time: Approx. 1.9 sec (6 M pixels, JPEG)

Video (SD Video)*

Codec: MPEG 2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video Proﬁ le) File Format: SD-Video format conforming

DV input IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 pin : 1 pc

USB port Type A : 1 pc

USB standard: USB 2.0 High Speed Format: FAT16, FAT32

Video (SD Video)*

Codec: MPEG 2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video Proﬁ le) File Format: SD-Video format conforming

Others

Region code: # 2 Operating temperature: 5 °C to 40 °C Operating humidity range: 10 % to 80 % RH (no condensation) Power supply: AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz Power consumption: Approx. 40 W Dimensions (W×H×D): 430 mm × 84 mm × 341 mm

(excluding the projecting parts)

430 mm × 84 mm × 350 mm

(including the projecting parts)

Mass: Approx. 6.3 kg

Power consumption in standby mode:

Approx. 2 W (Power Save mode)

Approx. 22 W (Quick Start mode)

Note

Speciﬁ cations are subject to change without notice. *1 Finalising is necessary for compatible playback. *2 Conforming to IEC62107

This unit is not compatible with “Chaoji VCD” available on the market including CVD, DVCD and SVCD that do not conform to IEC62107.

*3 Includes miniSD cards. (A miniSD adaptor needs to be inserted.)

Includes microSD cards. (A microSD adaptor needs to be

inserted.) *4 Long ﬁ le name is unsupported. *5 Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from card or

Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc, to HDD or

DVD-RAM disc. After Video Recording conversion and transfer to

HDD or DVD-RAM disc, the playback is possible. y Useable capacity will be less. (SD card)

RQT9090

Glossary

RQT9090

Bitstream

This is the digital form of multi-channel audio data (e.g., 5.1 channel) before it is decoded into its various channels.

CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)

CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with CPRM compatible recorders and discs.

Decoder

A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This is called decoding.

Deep Colour

This unit incorporates HDMI that can reproduce greater colour gradation (4096 steps) when connected to a compatible TV. You can enjoy exceptionally rich, natural-looking colours, with smooth, detailed gradation and minimal colour banding. [A lower colour gradation (256 steps), without deep colour, will be reproduced if connected to a TV which does not support deep colour. The unit will automatically set appropriate output to suit the connected TV.]

DivX

DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX media ﬁ les contain highly compressed video with high visual quality that maintains a relatively small ﬁ le size.

Dolby Digital

This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio, these signals can also be multi-channel audio. A large amount of audio information can be recorded on one disc using this method. When recording on this unit Dolby Digital (2 channel) is the default audio.

Down-mixing

This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on some discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to the 5.1-channel audio recorded on DVDs through your television’s speakers. Some discs prohibit down-mixing and this unit can then only output the front two channels.

Drive

In the instance of this unit, this refers to the hard disk (HDD), disc (DVD), video cassette (VHS) and SD card (SD). These perform the reading and writing of data.

DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are possible.

Dynamic range

Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest level of sound before distortion occurs. Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the loudest and softest sounds. This means you can listen at low volumes but still hear dialogue clearly.

Film and video

DVD-Videos are recorded using either ﬁ lm or video. This unit can determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable method of progressive output.

Film: Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24

frames per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs recorded at 30 frames per second as well.) Generally appropriate for motion picture ﬁ lms.

Video: Recorded at 25 frames/50 ﬁ elds per second (PAL

discs) or 30 frames/60 ﬁ elds per second (NTSC discs). Generally appropriate for TV drama programmes or animation.

Finalise

A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, etc. possible on equipment that can play such media. You can ﬁ nalise DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL on this unit. After ﬁ nalising, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer record or edit. However, ﬁ nalised DVD-RW can be formatted for recording again.

Folder

This is a place on the hard disk, disc or SD card where groups of data are stored together. In the case of this unit, it refers to the place where still pictures (JPEG) and MPEG2 are stored.

(V.1.3 with Deep Colour) technology

Formatting

Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM recordable on recording equipment. You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format), +RW, SD cards and the HDD or unused +R and +R DL on this unit. Formatting permanently deletes all contents.

Frames and ﬁ elds

Frames refer to the single images that constitute the video you see on your television. Each frame consists of two ﬁ elds.

Frame Field Field

y A frame still shows two ﬁ elds, so there may be some blurring, but

picture quality is generally better.

y A ﬁ eld still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but

there is no blurring.

HDD (Hard disk drive)

This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk with a surface that has been treated with magnetic ﬂ uid is spun and a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.

HDMI (High-Deﬁ nition Multimedia Interface)

Unlike conventional connections, it transmits uncompressed digital video and audio signals on a single cable. This unit supports high-deﬁ nition video output [720p (750p), 1080i (1125i), 1080p (1125p)] from HDMI AV OUT terminals. To enjoy high-deﬁ nition video a high deﬁ nition compatible television is required.

JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)

This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures. If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc., the data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The beneﬁ t of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering the degree of compression.

LPCM (Linear PCM)

These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on CDs.

MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)

A standard for efﬁ ciently compressing and expanding colour video. MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based digital broadcasting. This unit records programmes using MPEG2. SD Video ﬁ les shot with a Panasonic SD video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.

MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)

An audio compression method that compresses audio to approximately one tenth of its size without any considerable loss of audio quality.

Pan&Scan/Letterbox

In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they be viewed on a widescreen television (16:9 aspect ratio), so images often don’t ﬁ t regular (4:3 aspect ratio) televisions. Two styles of picture, “Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.

Pan & Scan:The sides are cut off so the picture

ﬁ lls the screen.

Letterbox: Black bands appear at the top and

bottom of the picture so the picture itself appears in an aspect ratio of 16:9.

Playback control (PBC)

If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and information with menus. (This unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)

Progressive/Interlace

The PAL video signal standard has 576 (or 625) interlaced (i) scan lines, whereas progressive scanning, called 576p (or 625p), uses twice the number of scan lines. For the NTSC standard, these are called 480i (or 525i) and 480p (or 525p) respectively. Using progressive output, you can enjoy the high-resolution video recorded on media such as DVD-Video. Your television must be compatible to enjoy progressive video. Panasonic televisions with 576 (625)/50i · 50p, 480 (525)/60i · 60p input terminals are progressive compatible.

Protection

You can prevent accidental deletion by setting writing protection or deletion protection.

RGB

This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G), and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses them. By dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission, noise is reduced for even higher quality images.

Sampling frequency

Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave (analogue signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the original sound.

Signal Quality

This is the guide for checking the aerial direction. The numbered values displayed do not indicate the strength of the signal, but the quality of the signal (the signal to noise ratio, or “S/N”). The channels you can receive are affected by weather conditions, seasons, time (day/night), region, length of the cable that is connected to the aerial, etc.

Thumbnail

This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display multiple pictures in the form of a list.

1080i

In one high deﬁ nition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines pass every 1/50

of a second to create an interlace image. Because 1080i (1125i) more than doubles current television broadcasts of 480i (525i), the detail is much clearer and creates a more realistic and rich image.

1080p

In one high deﬁ nition image, 1080 (1125) scan lines pass at the same time every 1/50

of a second to create a progressive image. Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there is a minimal amount of screen ﬂ icker.

720p

In one high deﬁ nition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the same time every 1/50

of a second to create a progressive image. Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there is a minimal amount of screen ﬂ icker.

Glossary

RQT9090

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries

These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC. By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items. Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.

For business users in the European Union

If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.

[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]

These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.

Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):

This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

“DTS” is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. and “DTS

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

y SDHC logo is a trademark. y Portions of this product are protected under copyright law and

are provided under license by ARIS/SOLANA/4C.

Ofﬁ cial DivX Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX®6) with standard playback of DivX® media ﬁ les. DivX, DivX Certiﬁ ed, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license.

Certiﬁ ed product.

HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Deﬁ nition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.

GUIDE Plus+, S Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its related afﬁ liates.

HOWVIEW and VIDEO Plus+ are trademarks of

GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM.

RQT9090

Gracenote® Corporate Description Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information visit www.gracenote.com.

Gracenote

Proprietary Legends CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000-2008 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000-2008 Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.

Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trademarks of Gracenote.

Gracenote® End-User License Agreement

USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW.

This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this application to perform disc and/or ﬁ le identiﬁ cation and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions of this application or device.

You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name.

The Gracenote service uses a unique identiﬁ er to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identiﬁ er is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service.

The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufﬁ cient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.

RQT9090

Index

Active Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Adjust the audio quality

(Sound menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Adjust the picture quality

(Picture menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Album (CD)

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Album (Still picture)

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Digital broadcast

(DVB Multi Audio) . . . . . . . . . 18, 20, 67

Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . 31

AV2 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Channel

Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 72

Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 46

Chasing playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Cleaning

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Video heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Clock Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Connection

Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 80, 81

Ampliﬁ er, receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 83

Digital satellite receiver, analogue

DV input terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 83

Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 11, 80–83

Video cassette recorder . . . . . 28, 80, 81

Copy

Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

SD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Title/Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Copy (playlist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Country setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

CPRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Create Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 47

Create playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Delete

Album (CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 51

All titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 49

Group (MP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 51

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 47

Track (MP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Digital Audio Output settings . . . . 74, 75

Digital broadcast

Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . 18

DVB Multi Audio . . . . . . . . 18, 20, 67, 72

DVB Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 20, 67, 72

New service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 74

Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Select the channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

System Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Direct Navigator . . . . . . . . . 35, 38, 46, 50

Direct TV Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–14

Display

Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . 18

Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 36–37, 96

DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . 29

decoder

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 81

DVB Multi Audio

Record with selected audio . . . . . . . . . 20

Select audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 67

DVB Subtitle

Record with subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Select subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 67

Show subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Edit

Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Music on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Enabling discs to be played on other

equipment – Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 96

Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 96

FR (Flexible Recording Mode) . . . . . . 24

FUNCTION MENU window . . . . . . . . . 43

Gracenote Group (MP3)

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

GUIDE Plus+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 33

HDAVI Control . . . . . . . 11, 44–45, 75, 83

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 75, 83, 96

High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 38, 96

Language

Code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Disc menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

On-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 73

Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 73

Linked timer recordings with external

equipment (digital satellite receiver)

—EXT LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 76

LPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 96

Manual Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36–37

MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Mode

Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Still Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 37, 96

Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 42

Music on HDD

Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Name

Album (CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Group (MP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 47

New service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 74

On-screen

Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

VIERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Power Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Progressive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 96

Properties

Music on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 50

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Protection

Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Q Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Quick View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Ratings level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 73

Auto Renewal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Direct TV Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

External Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 30–33

Relief Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Remote control code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 66

Resume play function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Select channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Series recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

SHOWVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Simultaneous rec and play . . . . . . . . . 25

Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Still picture

Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Subtitle

Digital broadcast

(DVB Subtitle) . . . . . . . . . 18, 20, 67, 72

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Switch the audio/subtitles on the disc

(Disc menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

System Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Time Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 30–33

Tuning

Analogue broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Digital broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 72

TV Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 33

TV System (PAL/NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

USB

Copy (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Copy (SD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Copy (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Supported formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

VHS

Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 60

Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Jet Rewind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 40–41

S-VHS Quasi Playback (SQPB) . . 41, 76 VHS Index Search System (VISS) . . . 41

VIERA Link . . . . . . . . . . 11, 44–45, 75, 83

Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Web Site: http://panasonic.net

Pursuant to at the directive 2004/108/EC, article 9(2) Panasonic Testing Centre Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany

RQT9090-L

H0408FJ0

Panasonic DMR-EX98V Operating Instructions

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual